Promaster
OWNER’S MANUAL
2015
2015 Promaster
15VF-126-AF SIXTH Edition Printed in U.S.A.
FCA US LLC
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2017 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ..................................71
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................123
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................197
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................283
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................325
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................385
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ............................................391
10
INDEX .....................................................................401
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
RAM is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to
body modifications or special equipment installed by van
conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. Refer
to the Warranty Information book, Section 2.1.C. Such
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters,
stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and
service on these items, contact the applicable manufac-
turer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment in-
stalled by the conversion/camper manufacturer should
also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions
are missing, please contact your authorized dealer for
assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the
applicable manufacturer.
For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to:
www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains di-
mensional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It
is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical
support. For service issues, contact your authorized
dealer.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle
6 INTRODUCTION
frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Infor-
mation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Vehicle Identification Number
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............11
▫ Ignition Key Removal ...................11
▫ Locking Doors With A Key ...............13
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................13
䡵 SENTRY KEY® .........................13
▫ Replacement Keys .....................14
▫ General Information ....................14
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................15
▫ Rearming Of The System .................15
▫ To Arm The System.....................15
▫ To Disarm The System ...................15
▫ Security System Manual Override ...........16
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY ...................16
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ............17
▫ To Unlock The Doors....................17
▫ To Lock The Doors .....................18
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters........18
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement ...........18
▫ General Information ....................19
2
䡵 POWER DOOR LOCKS ...................20
▫ Automatic Door Locks ..................21
▫ Auto Unlock Doors ....................22
䡵 WINDOWS ...........................22
▫ Power Windows .......................22
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................23
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........24
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features ........24
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............24
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................25
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ........39
▫ Child Restraints .......................54
▫ Transporting Pets ......................63
䡵 FUEL CUT OFF SWITCH ..................63
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ....64
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ..........................65
▫ Transporting Passengers..................65
▫ Exhaust Gas .........................66
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................67
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ....................69
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The Key Fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter with an integrated key. To use the mechanical
key, simply push the mechanical key release button.
The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key
code numbers to order duplicate keys, and the autho-
rized studio that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys.
Ignition Key Removal
1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission).
2. Rotate the key to the OFF/LOCK position.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
3. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK and re-
move the Key Fob from the vehicle. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
3 — AVV (START)
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key to the right. To unlock the door, turn
the key to the left. Refer to “Body Lubrication” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for maintenance procedures.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK sounds a
signal to remove the key.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unau-
thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned
to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Sentry Key® from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
• The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not com-
patible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key® has been programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. When hav-
ing the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring
all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
The VIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of
keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Ve-
hicle Security Alarm is activated, interior switches for
door locks are disabled. The system provides both au-
dible and visible signals. For the first three minutes, the
horn will sound, and the turn signal lights will flash. For
an additional 15 minutes, only the turn signal lights will
flash.
Rearming Of The System
If the system has not been disabled, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will rearm itself after the 15 additional minutes of
turn lamps flashing. If the condition which initiated the
alarm is still present, the system will ignore that condi-
tion and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
To Arm The System
To arm the system, The Vehicle Security Alarm will set
when you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
ter to lock the doors. If a door or the hood is not properly
shut, the alarm system will not be armed.
To Disarm The System
Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door and disarm
the system.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
The Vehicle Security Alarm will also disarm if a pro-
grammed Sentry Key® is inserted into the ignition
switch. To exit the alarming mode, push the RKE trans-
mitter UNLOCK button, or insert a programmed Sentry
Key® into the ignition switch.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or manually
from the driver door cylinder to unlock the doors or open
any door.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in
the “Dome ON” position.
• The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome OFF” position.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a
hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The
RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked with
metal objects.
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the UNLOCK button on RKE transmit-
ter once to unlock only the front doors. Push and release
the CARGO UNLOCK button on RKE transmitter once to
Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
unlock the cargo area (rear lateral sliding doors and rear
door). The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge
the unlock signal.
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash to
acknowledge the signal; the horn will chirp too during
turn signal lights flashing.
If a door is ajar, the turn signal lights will flash at an
increased rate, and there will be no horn chirp. This is to
indicate that a door is still ajar.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to “Sentry Key®” in “Things To Know Before
Starting” for further information.
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may ap-
ply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
1. Push the mechanical key release button and release the
mechanical key to access the battery case screw lo-
cated on the side of the Key Fob.
2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the Key Fob
using a small screwdriver.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the
battery observing its polarity.
4. Refit the battery case inside the Key Fob and turn the
screw to lock it into place.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years with normal
usage.
Key Fob Screw Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The central LOCK/UNLOCK button has an LED that
indicates whether the doors are locked or unlocked.
• LED ON: Doors locked. Push central LOCK/
UNLOCK button once again to centrally unlock all
doors. The LED will switch off.
• LED OFF: Doors unlocked. Push the central LOCK/
UNLOCK button again to centrally lock all doors. The
doors will be locked only if all the doors are properly
closed.
Once the doors have been locked with the RKE transmit-
ter, it will no longer be possible to unlock them by
pushing central LOCK/UNLOCK button.
To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to
the detent.
The load compartment power door lock switch is located
on the driver door trim panel. Use this switch to lock or
unlock the load compartment doors.
Load Compartment Power Door Lock Switch
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and re-
move the Key Fob from the vehicle. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Automatic Door Locks
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h). The
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled
through the EVIC or the Uconnect® system.
Auto Unlock Doors
This feature unlocks all doors when the driver door is
open.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The control on the left front door panel has UP-DOWN
switches that give you fingertip control of all power
windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on
the front passenger door for passenger window control.
NOTE: The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the
power windows to operate for up to three minutes after
the ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when
either front door is opened.
Power Window Switches
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Auto-Down Feature
The front window switches are equipped with an Auto-
Down feature. Push the window switch for a short period
of time, release, and the window will go down automati-
cally.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
and release it when you want the window to stop.
NOTE: The power window switches remain active for up
to three minutes (depending on the accessory delay
setting) after the ignition switch has been turned OFF.
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down in certain open or partially open posi-
tions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized.
If the buffeting occurs open the front windows together
to minimize the buffeting.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask
your authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in
this section for further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information) should be secured in a
vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not
use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a
rear seat.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to
the “If You Need Consumer Assistance” section for
customer service contact information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when-
ever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal
for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is
first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both
outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard
front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un-
buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended
that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with out-
board front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
(Continued)
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
WARNING! (Continued)
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a colli-
sion.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
Positioning The Lap Belt
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front outboard passenger seats, the top
of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or down-
ward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push
or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
Adjustable Anchorage
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release but-
ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder
belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Adjustable Anchorage
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy
Management feature that may help further reduce the
risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belt in the passenger seating position is
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The figure below
illustrates the locking feature for each seating position.
Front Bucket Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Location
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
(Continued)
Front Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING! (Continued)
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask
your authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring as-
sociated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the elec-
tronic parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the AVV/START or MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position the air bag system is
not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses
power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is in the
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the
Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a
malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air
Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes
on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bag
system to protect you in a collision. If the light does
not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first
turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering
wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag Locations
1 — Driver Front Air Bag
2 — Passenger Front Air Bag
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your
arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument
panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The driver and passenger front air bag system is de-
signed to inflate based on the severity and type of
collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC), which may receive information from the
front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system com-
ponents.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
(Continued)
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional pro-
tection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are
not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in
all frontal collisions, including some that may produce
substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of supplemental
Side Air Bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR-
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
•
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of
the SABICs. The trim covering above the side
windows where the SABIC and its deployment
path are located should remain free from any
obstructions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)
for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into
the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. The
side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The system is
calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side
of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a
good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against
or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children,
should never lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the side air bags inflate,
even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re-
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain side impact events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Fuel Cut Off Switch
Your vehicle is equipped with a Fuel Cut Off safety
switch. In the event of an accident, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains intact,
depending on the nature of the event, the Fuel Cut Off
Switch may perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine and turn off the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine com-
partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to
the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
accident, reset the Fuel Cut Off Switch by following the
procedure described below.
Fuel Cut Off Switch Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Fuel Cut Off Switch after an event
push the “A” Button located underneath the instrument
panel on the passenger side.
WARNING!
If, after an accident, you smell fuel or see leaks from
the fuel system, do not reset the Fuel Cut Off Switch
to avoid the risk of fire. Before resetting the Fuel Cut
(Continued)
Fuel Cut Off Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING! (Continued)
Off Switch, carefully check for fuel leaks or damage
to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights).
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Infants and
Toddlers
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child re-
straint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve-
hicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
(Continued)
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING! (Continued)
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
Installing Child Restraints In Commercial Vehicles
This commercial vehicle is not designed for use as a
family vehicle and is not intended for carrying children
in the front passenger seat(s). Never install rear-facing
child restraints in this vehicle. Although the seat belt can
be locked to secure a child restraint, there are no tether
anchorages to complete the proper installation of a
forward-facing child restraint. If you must carry a child
in a forward-facing child restraint, the passenger seat
should be moved to the full rearward position and the
child must be in a proper restraint system based on its
age, size and weight. Follow the instructions below to
secure the child restraint using the seat belt.
WARNING!
Rear-facing infant restraints must never be secured
in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a passenger air
bag. In a collision, a passenger air bag may deploy
causing severe injury or death to infants riding in
rear-facing infant restraints.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description in “Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems”
for additional information on ALR.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Bucket Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Location
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Front Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
FUEL CUT OFF SWITCH
The vehicle is fitted with a safety switch that, in the event
of an accident, comes into operation by cutting off the
fuel supply and turning off the engine as a consequence.
When the inertia switch cuts in, this cuts off the fuel
supply and also activates the hazard warning lights, side
lights, and courtesy lights while releasing all the doors
and displaying a message; they are deactivated by push-
ing button A.
NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. If
no fuel leaks or damage to vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) are detected after the impact, reactivate the
automatic fuel cut off following the procedure described
below.
WARNING!
If, after a crash, you smell fuel or see leaks from the
fuel system, do not reset the switches to avoid the
risk of fire.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Reactivating the fuel cut off switch:
1. Push the button A to reactivate the fuel cut off switch.
WARNING!
Before reactivating the fuel cut off switch, carefully
check for fuel leaks or damage to vehicle electrical
devices (e.g. headlights).
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
Fuel Cut Off Switch
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
(Continued)
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS .............................74
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped .....74
▫ Outside Mirrors .......................74
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature ...........75
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped .............75
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ............76
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped .......76
䡵 SEATS ...............................78
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustments ............78
▫ Air Seat — If Equipped .................83
▫ Swivel Seat — If Equipped ...............84
▫ Flap On Bench — If Equipped .............85
▫ Underseat Storage Tray (Driver Side Only) — If
Equipped ............................86
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ..............87
▫ Head Restraints .......................88
▫ Adjustable Armrests — If Equipped .........90
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........91
䡵 LIGHTS ..............................93
▫ Multifunction Lever.....................93
3
▫ Headlights ...........................94
▫ Dimmer Controls ......................94
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped ......94
▫ Battery Saver .........................95
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ................95
▫ Turn Signals ..........................95
▫ Parking Lights ........................96
▫ Lane Change Assist ....................96
▫ High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........96
▫ Flash-To-Pass .........................96
▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay..........96
▫ Map/Dome/Lights .....................97
▫ Cargo Lamp .........................98
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......99
▫ Windshield Wipers .....................99
▫ Intermittent Wiper System ...............100
▫ Low Speed ..........................100
▫ High Speed..........................100
▫ Mist Feature .........................100
▫ Windshield Washer Operation.............101
䡵 TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN ........101
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL ...........102
▫ To Activate ..........................103
▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................104
▫ To Deactivate ........................104
▫ To Resume Speed .....................104
72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............104
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ................106
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................107
▫ ParkSense® Rear Park Assist Sensors........107
▫ ParkSense® Rear Park Assist Alerts .........108
▫ ParkSense® Rear Park Assist Failure
Indications ..........................110
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System .............................110
▫ ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System Usage
Precautions ..........................111
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................113
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED .....115
▫ Map/Dome/Lights ....................115
䡵 POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED .........116
䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................119
䡵 CUPHOLDERS ........................119
䡵 STORAGE ............................120
▫ Glove Compartments ..................120
▫ Front Door Storage — If Equipped .........121
▫ Dash Storage ........................121
▫ Dashboard Clipboard ...................122
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES ................122
▫ CargoArea .........................122
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Manual Rearview Mirror
74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they
really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
could cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when judging
the size or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have
three detent positions:
• Full forward position
• Full rearward position
• Normal position
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the driver-side
door trim panel.
To adjust a mirror, turn the control knob toward the left
upper, left lower, right upper or right lower mirror
positions indicated by one of the four arrow’s on the
Power Mirror Controls
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75
switch. Tilt the control wand in the direction you want
the mirror to move. When you are finished adjusting the
mirror, turn the control to the center position “O” to
prevent accidentally moving a mirror.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster button located in the temperature
controls. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Under-
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located on the
drivers door panel below the power mirror controls.
Push the switch to the right and the mirrors will fold in,
push the switch to the left and the mirrors will return to
the normal driving position.
The power fold mirrors are designed to be folded and
unfolded using the power folding switch. If the mirrors
are manually folded, the mirror head may appear loose.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
1 — Power Folding Mirror (Normal Driving Position)
2 — Power Folding Mirror (Fold In Position)
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the mirror head or pivot exhibits a slight amount of
play, the mirror should be power folded closed, then
power folded open (this may require multiple button
pushes).
NOTE: The intended use of the power fold mirrors is by
pushing the buttons to fold and unfold the mirrors. Only
manually fold the mirrors when necessary.
Forward Folding
Mirrors can be folded forward manually or by accidental
impact. In this case it is possible to restore to position
both ways, manually and electrically (as described
above).
Power/Manual Folding Mirror Positions
1 — Normal Driving Position
2 — Fold In Position
3 — Fold Forward Position
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
The driver and passenger seats can be adjusted forward,
rearward, reclined, front and rear height and lumbar
adjustments.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear-
ward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. The lumbar control knob is
located on the rear upper outboard side of the driver’s
seatback. Rotate the control forward to increase and
rearward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar
support.
Drivers Seat
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjusting Bar
2 — Lumbar Knob
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
Height Adjustment (Without Swivel Seat) — If
Equipped
The height adjusting levers are located on the center
outboard side of the seat. Lift up on the front lever to
adjust the front of the seat up or down. Lift up on the rear
lever to adjust the rear of the seat up or down.
Height Adjustment Levers
1 — Front Height Adjusting Lever
2 — Rear Height Adjusting Lever
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Height Adjustment (With Swivel Seat) — If Equipped
The height adjusting knobs are located on the center
outboard side of the seat. Rotate the front knob to adjust
the front of the seat up or down. Rotate the rear knob to
adjust the rear of the seat up or down.
Height Adjustment Knobs
1 — Front Height Adjusting Knob
2 — Rear Height Adjusting Knob
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
Recliner Adjustment — Without Swivel Seat
The recliner knob is on the rear outboard side of the seat.
To recline the seatback, lean back, rotate the knob rear-
ward to position the seatback as desired. To return the
seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward,
rotate the knob forward until the seatback is in the
upright position.
Recliner Adjustment — With Swivel Seat
The recliner lever is located at the lower front outboard
side of the seat. To recline the seatback, lean forward
slightly, pull the lever outward, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback to its
normal upright position, lean forward and pull the lever
Recliner Knob
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
outward. Release the lever once the seatback is in the
upright position.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Air Seat — If Equipped
The seat is equipped with a mechanical spring system
and hydraulic shock absorber to ensure maximum com-
fort and safety. The system of springs also effectively
absorbs impact from uneven road surfaces.
Recliner Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
Damper Weight Adjustment
Use the weight adjustment knob to set the required
setting based on body weight, with settings between
88 lbs (40 kg) and 286 lbs (130 kg).
Swivel Seat — If Equipped
The swivel seat lever is located at the lower front inboard
side of the seat. The seat may be turned through 180°
toward the seat on the opposite side and approximately
35° toward the door. The seat may be locked in the
driving position or at the 180° position. To swivel the
seat, pull the swivel seat inboard lever outward, turn the
seat to the desired position and release the lever. The
swivel seat back lever is located at the lower front
outboard side of the seat, to tilt the seat back forward or
rearward.
If the vehicle is equipped with interlocking swivel seats,
the seats must be locked in facing forward position while
driving. If the seats are not in the correct position, a
warning will display in the EVIC.
If the driver or the passenger seats are not locked in
facing forward position before the first vehicle move-
ment, shifting out of park is not allowed until the seats
Weight Adjustment Knob
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
are both locked in facing forward position. When the
seats are not in the right position and the first vehicle
movement after the cranking is attempted, a chime and a
text message will appear in EVIC. Rotate and lock the
swivel seats in the correct position before trying again.
If the driver or the passenger seats are not locked in
facing forward position during movement of the vehicle,
a message will be visualized in the EVIC and an inter-
mittent chime will sound until key-off or until the swivel
seats are locked in facing forward position. Stop and
move the swivel seats in the correct position before
proceeding.
If a fault is present in the system and it is not possible to
check the correct position of the swivel seats, a message
and the generic warning light appears in the EVIC to
inform about the failure. In these conditions, check the
status of the swivel seats and not drive the vehicle until
the swivel seats are locked in facing forward position.
Flap On Bench — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with a bench seat, the seat is
equipped with a fold-down flap that can be used as a
document support surface. To use the fold-down flap,
grasp the pull tab and lower the flap.
Swivel Seat Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
The fold-down flap is equipped with two cup holders
and a support surface with a paper holder clip.
Underseat Storage Tray (Driver Side Only) — If
Equipped
A storage tray is located under the drivers seat that can
be easily removed by withdrawing the hooks on the
support base.
Fold-Down Flap Pull Tab Fold-Down Flap
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the lower outboard side of the seat.
Push the switch once to turn on the heated seats. Push the
switch a second time to shut the heating elements off.
Underseat Storage Tray
Heated Seat Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly installed and adjusted prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should
never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button located on the base of the head restraint and
push downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as it can go
then push the adjustment button and the release button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint
up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint
posts into the holes then adjust it to the appropriate
height.
Adjustment Buttons
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to oper-
ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees
to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
Adjustable Armrests — If Equipped
The seat adjustable armrest can be raised and adjusted
for height. Underneath the front of the armrest is the
adjuster wheel which will adjust the height of the armrest
up or down.
Adjuster Wheel Location
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn the adjuster wheel to the right or left to adjust the
height of the armrest up or down.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Open the drivers door to gain access to the hood
release lever. Pull the hood release lever located on the
side of the instrument panel.
Adjuster Wheel
Hood Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, reach into the
opening beneath the center of the hood and push the
safety latch lever to the right to release it, before
raising the hood.
3. Raise the hood and place the hood prop rod in hood
slot to secure the hood in the open position.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage:
• Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod
is fully seated into its storage retaining clips.
(Continued)
Hood Safety Latch Lever Location
Hood Prop Rod Slot
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm
downward push at the center front edge of the
hood to ensure that both latches engage. Never
drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight beam
selection and the passing lights. The multifunction lever
is located on the left side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
Headlights
To turn on the headlights, turn the end of the
multifunction lever to the headlight position.
When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light, the clear-
ance lights and instrument panel lights are also turned
on. To turn off the headlights, turn the end of the
multifunction lever back to the O (Off) position.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are located on the left side of the
instrument panel below the instrument cluster.
Pushing the up or down arrow will increase or decrease
the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights will be deactivated.
Dimmer Controls
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the
end of the multifunction lever to the O (Off) position.
NOTE: The low beams and side/taillights will not be on
with DRL. The DRL function may be programmed to be
ON or OFF through the Uconnect® system screen if
equipped, or through the instrument clusters menu.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” or “EVIC” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The Daytime Running Lights will come on whenever the
ignition is ON, the headlight switch is off, the parking
brake is off, and the turn signal is off.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery when the
ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 15 minutes the
interior lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located on the center
stack of the instrument panel, just below the
climate controls. Push the switch once to turn
the fog lights on. Push the switch a second time to turn
the fog lights off.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Parking Lights
These lights can only be turned on with ignition key in
the STOP position or removed, by moving the end of the
multifunction lever to O (off) position and then to the
headlight position.
The warning light telltale in the instrument panel comes
on. The lights stay on until the next ignition cycle is
performed.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash five
times then automatically turn off.
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch
Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the
headlights to high beam. Pull the lever a second time to
switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK
position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the
steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever
is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by
30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to
a maximum of 210 seconds.
The warning light on the instrument panel will light up
and the corresponding message will appear in the EVIC
display for as long as the function is activated. The
warning light comes on when the lever is operated and
stays on until the function is automatically deactivated.
Each movement of the lever only increases the amount of
time the lights stay on.
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel
and hold it for more than two seconds.
Map/Dome/Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pushing the
corresponding switch.
Left Switch
• Push the left switch to the left to turn OFF the auto
dome lights. The dome lights will not automatically
turn on when a door is opened.
• Push the left switch to the right to turn ON the dome
lights.
Right Switch
• Push the right switch to the left to turn ON the left
map light.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
• Push the right switch to the right to turn ON the right
map light.
Cargo Lamp
The Rear Cargo Lamp is located at the upper rear cargo
area above the rear doors.
Map/Dome Lights
1 — Auto/Off 3 — Left Map
2 — Dome 4 — Right Map
Rear Cargo Lamp
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Side Cargo Lamp
located at the upper rear area of the passenger side
sliding door opening.
The Cargo Lamps can be set to three different positions
(Off/Right Position, Center Position, On/Left Position).
• Push the Cargo Lamp lens to the right from its center
position and the lamp is always off.
• Leave the Cargo Lamp lens in the center position, and
the lamp is turned on and off when the sliding doors
or rear doors are opened or closed.
• Push the Cargo Lamp lens to the left from its center
position and the lamp is always on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the
right side of the steering column. There are five different
modes of operation for the front windshield wipers. The
windshield wiper lever can be raised or lowered to access
the modes.
Side Cargo Lamp
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only oper-
ate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Intermittent Wiper System
Push the lever downward to the first detent and rotate
the center ring to use one of the four intermittent wiper
settings when weather conditions make a single wiping
cycle, with a variable delay between cycles, desirable.
Low Speed
Push the lever downward to the second detent. The
wipers will operate at low speed.
High Speed
Push the lever downward to the third detent. The wipers
will operate at high speed.
Mist Feature
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever
upward to the Mist position and release for a single
wiping cycle.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/washer
lever toward the steering wheel to activate the washers.
The wipers will activate automatically for three cycles
after the lever is released. and then resume the intermit-
tent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers
will operate for three cycles, then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The telescoping control handle is lo-
cated below the steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
up. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the
steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To
lock the steering column in position, push the control
handle down until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h) up to the maximum speed of 100 mph
(160 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control Lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Telescoping Control Handle
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by rotating the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF center ring and resetting the
desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Rotate the center ring upward on the electronic speed
control lever to turn the system ON. The Cruise Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn
the system OFF, rotate the center ring upward a second
time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
Electronic Speed Control Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, move the electronic speed
control lever upward SET(+) and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before moving the electronic speed
control lever upward SET(+).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the RES button, or
normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the
set speed memory. Rotating the center ring upward to
turn the system OFF or turning the ignition switch OFF
erases the set speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h) up to the maximum speed of 100 mph
(160 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by tapping the Speed Control lever up (+).
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
radio settings if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed increment shown is dependant
on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Tapping the Speed Control lever up (+) once will result
in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap
of the lever results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the lever is continually held up, the set speed will
continue to increase until the lever is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Tapping the Speed Control lever up (+) once will result
in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap
of the lever results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the lever is continually held up, the set speed will
continue to increase until the lever is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by tapping the Speed Control lever down (-).
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
radio settings if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more
information. The speed increment shown is dependant
on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Tapping the Speed Control lever down (-) once will
result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the lever results in a decrease of 1 mph.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
• If the lever is continually held down, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the lever is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Tapping the Speed Control lever down (-) once will
result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the lever results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the lever is continually held down, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the lever is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides an
audible indication of the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up,
e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense®
System Usage Precautions for limitations of this system
and recommendations.
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist is automatically acti-
vated when the transmission is placed into REVERSE. As
the distance from an obstacle behind the vehicle de-
creases, the audible alert becomes more frequent.
Interaction With Trailer Towing
The Rear Park Assist system is automatically deactivated
when a trailer is hitched to the vehicle. The system will be
automatically activated as soon as the trailer is removed.
ParkSense® Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four ParkSense® Rear Park Assist sensors, located in
the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
sensors can detect obstacles, in the horizontal direction,
from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 55 in (140 cm)
from the center of the rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 in
(60 cm) from the corners of the rear fascia/bumper,
depending on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
If several obstacles are detected, the ParkSense® Rear
Park Assist system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corre-
sponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would
clear the underside of the car during the parking maneu-
ver.
ParkSense® Rear Park Assist Alerts
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear
is engaged, an audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver
that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses
between the tones are directly proportional to the dis-
tance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succes-
sion indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A
continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than
12 in (30 cm) away.
Rear Park Assist Sensors Location
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present within the
sensors’ field of view
Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate that in-
creases as the distance decreases.
• Emits continuous tone at 12 in (30 cm).
• Adjustable volume level programmable
through personal settings in the EVIC. Re-
fer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter (EVIC) Setup Menu” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel”.
Failure Sensor or System failures Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display.
• Message is displayed on multifunction
display (where provided).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not
muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the
distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the
distance measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this
condition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is
turned off after three seconds (stopping warnings during
maneuvers parallel to walls).
ParkSense® Rear Park Assist Failure Indications
A malfunction of the ParkSense® Rear Park Assist sen-
sors or system is indicated, during REVERSE gear en-
gagement, by the instrument panel warning icon.
The warning icon is illuminated and a message
is displayed on the multifunction display (if
equipped). Refer to “Instrument Cluster De-
scriptions” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indi-
cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor
is in failure condition, the instrument cluster display
shall indicate that the ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
system is unavailable, without reference to the sensor in
failure condition. If even a single sensor fails, the entire
system must be disabled. The system is turned off
automatically.
Cleaning The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System
Clean the ParkSense® Rear Park Assist sensors with
water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough
or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean sensors quickly
keeping the vapor jet/high pressure washing nozzles at
least 4 in (10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke
the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® Rear Park Assist System Usage
Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist
system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.
• Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must
not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or
debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not
working properly. The Rear Park Assist system might
not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the fascia/bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be
placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
CAUTION! (Continued)
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to filter
out the ball mount and hitch ball assembly presence in
sensor field of view. The filtering operation must be
performed only by an authorized dealer.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE and/or when the rear
doors are opened. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check
entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera is located on the top rear of the vehicle
below the center light.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE and/or
when the rear doors are closed, the rear camera mode is
exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again.
Rear Back Up Camera Location
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle and will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The
following table shows the approximate distances for each
zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
NOTE: ParkView Rear Back Up Camera can be enabled
or disabled by Uconnect system menu.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Back Up Camera. Always check care-
fully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
for the safety of your surroundings and must con-
tinue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
(Continued)
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED
The overhead console is located on the headliner above
the review mirror. The overhead console contains the
following features:
• Automatic Dome Lights
• Dome Lights
• Map Lights
Map/Dome/Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pushing the
corresponding switch.
Left Switch
• Push the left switch to the left to turn OFF the auto
dome lights. The dome lights will not automatically
turn on when a door is opened.
• Push the left switch to the right to turn ON the dome
lights.
Right Switch
• Push the right switch to the left to turn ON the left
map light.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
• Push the right switch to the right to turn ON the right
map light.
POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
Passenger Compartment Power Outlet
The cigar lighter and the power outlet are located in the
center console. It only operates with the ignition key at
MAR/ON.
Map/Dome Lights
1 — Auto/Off 3 — Left Map
2 — Dome 4 — Right Map
Passenger Compartment Power Outlet
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Load Compartment Power Outlet
The Load Compartment Power Outlet is located on the
left rear side of the rear cargo compartment. The outlet
can be is used for powering 12 Volt adaptive accessories
and recharging communications devices.
NOTE: Do not connect devices with power higher than
180 W to the socket. Do not damage the socket by using
unsuitable adaptors.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F14 Fuse 20 A Yellow Front Power Outlet
2 — F09 Fuse 15 A Blue Rear Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED
A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available.
CUPHOLDERS
The cupholders for the drivers and passenger area are
located near the floor just under the center stack storage
compartment. There are cupholders located in each door
panel as well as one single cupholder located to the right
of the manual climate controls.
Optional Ash Receiver And Cigar Lighter
Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
STORAGE
Glove Compartments
The glove compartments are located on the right side of
the instrument panel.
Glove Compartments
1 — Upper Glove Compartment
2 — Lower Glove Compartment
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas and bottle holders are located in both the
front door trim panels.
Dash Storage
The dash storage is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
Front Door Storage Dash Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Dashboard Clipboard
Located on top of the dashboard is a clipboard and two
storage bins on each side of the clipboard.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Area
The cargo area may be equipped with different options
such as a optional side panels, rear seats and an optional
floor.
Clipboard And Storage Bins
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........126
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................127
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS .....128
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) ........................141
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu .........................143
▫ Change Engine Oil Indicator System ........145
▫ Trip Computer .......................146
▫ Trip Button ..........................146
▫ Trip Functions .......................147
▫ Values Displayed ......................148
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) ...........................149
䡵 Uconnect® RH3 ........................149
▫ Introduction .........................149
▫ Recommendations .....................150
▫ Identification Number ..................151
▫ Security Code ........................151
▫ General.............................153
4
▫ Uconnect® RH3 Display.................154
▫ General Functions And Settings ...........155
▫ Tuner Mode (AM/FM Radio) .............157
▫ Setup Menu .........................160
▫ Clock ..............................161
▫ USB Mode (MP3/WMA/AAC) ...........161
䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS ...................169
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate................170
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen..............171
▫ Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings.............................171
䡵 Uconnect® RADIOS .....................179
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .179
▫ USB Charging Port ....................180
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ......181
▫ Radio Operation ......................182
䡵 CD DISC MAINTENANCE ...............182
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .182
▫ General Information ...................183
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................183
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning ......183
䡵 Uconnect® 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS ................................189
▫ Introducing Uconnect® .................189
▫ Get Started ..........................189
▫ Basic Voice Commands..................191
124 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 10 — Lower Glove Compartment 19 — Uconnect® Phone Buttons
2 — Multifunction Lever (External Lights) 11 — Cup Holder 20 — Tilt Steering Column Release Lever
3 — Instrument Cluster 12 — USB Charger/12V 21 — Horn
4 — Multifunction Lever (Front/Rear Wiper, Trip Computer)
13 — Climate Controls
22 — Mute/Uconnect® Voice Command Buttons
5 — Radio 14 — Lower Switch Ban 23 — Cruise Control Switches
6 — Clip Board 15 — Cup Holders 24 — Fuse Box Lid
7 — Upper Glove Compartment 16 — Shift Lever
25 — Electronic Vehicle information Center (EVIC) Controls
8 — Passenger Air Bag 17 — USB / AUX 26 — Hood Release
9 — Storage Compartment 18 — Ignition Switch
126 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour (mph) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h).
2. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn
signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
NOTE:
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator remains on and does not flash or flashes at
a rapid rate.
3. Stop Light Failure Indicator
This light will illuminate if one or more of the
stop light bulb fails.
The failure relating to this light could be:
• One or more blown bulbs
• A blown protection fuse
• A break in the electrical connection
4. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
5. High Beam Indicator
This light shows that the high beam headlights
are on. Pull the multifunction lever toward you
to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the
lever a second time to switch the headlights back to low
beam.
128 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
7. Odometer/Trip Odometer/Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC) Display Area
This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
Shift Lever Status (PRND)
The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,1,2,3,4,5,6” are displayed
indicating the shift lever position. Telltales “1,2,3,4,5,6”
indicate the manual mode has been engaged and the gear
selected is displayed. Refer to “Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information on ERS.
8. External Light Failure Indicator — If Equipped
The External Light Failure Indicator will come
on when a failure to one of the following lights
is detected:
• Direction Indicators
• Backup Lights
• Parking Lights
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
• Daytime Running Lights
• Clearance Lights
• License Plate Lights
The failure relating to these lights could be:
• One or more blown bulbs
• A blown protection fuse
• A break in the electrical connection
9. Vehicle Security Light
If during starting, the key code is not correctly
recognized, the Vehicle Security Light comes
on in the instrument panel. In this case, turn
the key to OFF and then to ON/RUN; if it is
still locked, try again with the other keys that come with
the vehicle. Contact an authorized dealer if you still
cannot start the engine.
If with the engine running the warning light flashes, this
means that the car is not protected by the engine inhibitor
device. Contact an authorized dealer to have all the keys
programmed.
10. Door Ajar Indicator
This indicator will illuminate when one or
more door(s) are not fully closed.
11. Tachometer
The tachometer indicates engine speed in Revolutions
Per Minute (RPM x 1000).
12. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
130 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
13. Electronic Speed Control Set Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is set.
14. Charging System Light — If Equipped
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the Charging System light
remains on, or comes on while driving, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. OBTAIN SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See your
authorized dealer.
Refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” if jump starting is required.
15. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied or
that the brake fluid level is low.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the
problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump
will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal
pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed and the
brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with ABS are also equipped with
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on
along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
132 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
16. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part
of an onboard diagnostic (OBDII) system
which monitors the emissions and engine con-
trol system. If the vehicle is ready for emissions
testing, the light will come on when the ignition is first
turned on and remain on, as a bulb check, until the
engine is started. If the vehicle is not ready for emissions
testing, the light will come on when the ignition is first
turned on and remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for
five seconds, and remain on until the vehicle is started. If
the bulb does not come on during starting, have the
condition investigated promptly.
If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
for system service.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
(Continued)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
WARNING! (Continued)
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
17. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-
rized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
(Continued)
134 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING! (Continued)
Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the “Cooling
System Pressure Cap” paragraph.
18. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As
engine coolant temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate, and a single
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
19. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition
key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the
shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position, and apply
the parking brake. The light should turn off. If the light
remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer
for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing
when the engine is running, immediate service is re-
quired, and you may experience reduced performance,
an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall; your vehicle may
require towing. The light will come on when the ignition
is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a
bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
20. TOW/HAUL
This light will illuminate when TOW HAUL
mode is selected.
21. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.7 L), this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel
is added.
22. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Reminder
When the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
position, the pointer will show the level of fuel
remaining in the fuel tank. The fuel pump
symbol points to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel door is located.
23. Generic Warning Light
The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if
any of the following conditions occur:
• Air Bag Warning Light Fault
• Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure
• Fuel Cut Off Intervention/Fail
• Parking Assistance Failure
• Engine Minimum Oil Level
• Engine Minimum Oil Pressure Fail
• Electronic Park Brake Fail Fixed — If Equipped
• Electronic Park Brake Inspection — If Equipped
• Electronic Park Brake Maintenance — If Equipped
• Electronic Park Brake Sensor Fail — If Equipped
• Swivel Seat Malfunction
136 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
24. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
25. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replace-
ment or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The TPMS telltale is also accompanied by a “Low
Tire” message in the Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter (EVIC). Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
26. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to
ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
check, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving,
if the driver or front passenger(s) seat belt remains
unbuckled, the seat belt reminder light will flash or
remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
27. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) is off. For further information, refer
to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in
“Starting And Operating.”
28. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned
to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON even if it was manually
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds and flash the ESC activation light when it is
active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when
ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that
caused the ESC activation.
29. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is
not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pushing the switches mounted on the
instrument panel. The EVIC Menu items consists of the
following:
• Speed Beep
• Trip B Data
• Set Time
• Set Date
• Autoclose
• Units
• Language
• Buzzer Volume
• Seat Belt Buzzer (*)
• (*) just available after SBR disable made by CHR
Service
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
• Service (Diesel Only)
• DRL - Daytime Running Light (if equipped)
• Exit Menu
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the instru-
ment panel to the left of the steering column:
• MODE Button
Push and HOLD the MODE button for a time longer than
1 second to access/select the information screens or
submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and hold the
MODE button for two seconds to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
EVIC Control Buttons
142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and sub-
menus or adjust the illumination on the instru-
ment panel when the headlights are on.
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus or adjust the illumination on the
instrument panel when the headlights are on.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Setup Menu
The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a
cycle. Push and release the UP
and DOWN but-
tons to access the different options and settings
(setup).
The setup menu can be activated by pushing the MODE
button. Single pushes on the UP
or DOWN but-
tons will scroll through the setup menu options. The
menu items include the following functions:
• Speed Beep
• Trip B Data
• Set Time
• Set Data
• Auto Lock
• Units (Distance, Fuel Economy, Temperature)
• Language
• Buzzer Volume
• Seat Belt Buzzer (*)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
• (*) just available after SBR disable made by CHR
Service
• Service (Diesel Only)
• DRL - Daytime Running Lights (if equipped)
• Exit menu
NOTE:
• If equipped with Uconnect® 5.0 radio, some cus-
tomer programmable features will display in the
Uconnect® 5.0 system. Refer to the radio supplement
for further Uconnect® 5.0 information.
• The EVIC clock setting and Uconnect® 5.0 clock
setting procedure can be done through the radio or
the EVIC.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without Sub-
menu
1. Briefly push and release the MODE button to select
the main menu option to set.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button (by
single pushes) to select the new setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MODE button to store the
new setting and go back to the main menu option
previously selected.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu
1. Briefly push and release the MODE button to display
the first submenu option.
2. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button (by
single pushes) to scroll through all the submenu
options.
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Briefly push and release the MODE button to select
the displayed submenu option and to open the rel-
evant setup menu.
4. Push and release the UP
or DOWN button (by
single pushes) to select the new setting for this
submenu option.
5. Briefly push and release the MODE button to store the
new setting and go back to the previously selected
submenu option.
6. Push and release and hold the MODE button to return
to the main menu (short hold) or the main screen
(longer hold).
Change Engine Oil Indicator System
Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will
display in the EVIC display. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and
release the MODE button. To reset the oil change indi-
cator system (after performing the scheduled mainte-
nance), refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times,
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Trip Computer
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It
features a driver-interactive display (displays informa-
tion such as trip information, range, fuel consumption,
average speed, and travel time).
Trip Button
The TRIP button, located on the right steering column
stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously
described values.
• A short button push displays the different values.
• A long button push resets the system and then starts a
new trip.
New Trip
To reset:
• Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system
manually.
• When the “Trip distance” reaches 9999.9 miles or
kilometers or when the “Travel time” reaches 999.59
(999 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset auto-
matically.
• Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the
system.
NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of
the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the infor-
mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be
reset.
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Start Of Trip Procedure
With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button for
over one second to reset.
Exit Trip
To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have
been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer than
one second.
Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to
the menu screen or push and hold the MENU (approxi-
mately one second) to go back to the main screen without
storing settings.
Trip Functions
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new
trip).
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Range
• Trip distance A
• Average consumption
• Instantaneous consumption
• Average speed A
• Travel time A (driving time)
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Trip distance B
• Average consumption
• Average speed B
• Travel time B (driving time)
NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip
B Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous consumption”
cannot be reset.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
Values Displayed
Range
This indicates the distance which may be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving
conditions will not change. The message “----” will
appear on the display in the following cases:
• Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
• The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine
running.
NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving
style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads,
etc.), conditions of use of the car (load, tire pressure, etc.).
Trip planning must take into account the above notes.
Distance Traveled
This value shows the distance covered since the last reset.
Average Economy
This value shows the approximate average consumption
since the last reset.
Instant Economy
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con-
stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the
display if the car is parked with the engine running.
Average Speed
This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a func-
tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.
Travel Time
This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
• Speed Beep
• Trip B Data
• Set Time
• Set Data
• Auto Lock
• Units (Distance, Fuel Economy, Temperature)
• Language
• Buzzer Volume
• Seat Belt Buzzer (*)
• (*) just available after SBR disable made by CHR
Service
• Service (Diesel Only)
• DRL - Daytime Running Light (if equipped)
• Exit menu
NOTE:
• If equipped with Uconnect® 5.0 radio, some cus-
tomer programmable features will display in the
Uconnect® 5.0 system. Refer to the Uconnect® Set-
tings for further Uconnect® 5.0 information.
• The EVIC clock setting and Uconnect® 5.0 clock
setting procedure can be done through the radio or
the EVIC.
Uconnect® RH3
Introduction
Your vehicle is equipped with a radio that has an
AM/FM radio receiver and a USB port for playing MP3,
WMA and AAC files. The device has been designed
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
according to the specific characteristics of the vehicle,
with a design matching the style of the instrument panel.
The radio is installed in an ergonomic position for the
driver and passenger with a diagram on the front panel
that allows the user commands to be identified quickly
and easily.
The directions for use are described below, and we advise
you to read these carefully.
NOTE: The operation of many of the resources men-
tioned in this publication depends on technology used by
radio stations and other base stations, which may not be
available at certain times and/or in particular locations.
Recommendations
Road Safety
We recommend that you learn how to use the various
radio features (for example, Station Preset) before you
begin your journey.
WARNING!
Turning the volume up too high may be dangerous
for the driver and other people on the road. You
should adjust the volume so that you are always able
to hear sounds around you (e.g. horns, ambulances,
police cars, etc.).
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio Reception
Reception varies constantly while driving.
Reception may be affected by mountains, buildings or
bridges, especially when further away from the transmit-
ter of the tuned radio station.
CAUTION!
When listening to traffic news, you may notice
louder volume compared to normal playback.
Care And Maintenance
The radio structure is built to guarantee many years of
operation without needing maintenance. In case of a
fault, contact your local authorized dealer.
Use only a soft, anti-static cloth to clean the front of the
radio.
Detergents and waxes can damage the surface.
Identification Number
The radio has a unique identification number (found on
the warranty card). This card is required as proof of
ownership if the radio is stolen or when seeking assis-
tance. Do not store the warranty card in the vehicle.
Security Code
This radio has a serial number (found on the ⬙warranty
card⬙).
Present this card as proof of ownership if the radio is
stolen or if you require assistance.
Do not store the warranty card in the vehicle.
If the electrical supply is disrupted, the unit will mute
and the display will show ⬙0000⬙ to indicate that you can
enter the security code.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
You must enter the security (shown on the ⬙warranty
card⬙, for example, 4359) code as follows:
Action Display
When you turn the radio on, the dis-
play shows ⬙0000⬙.
0000
Push the number 1 preset button un-
til the first digit of the code number
is displayed.
4---
Push the number 2 preset button un-
til the second digit of the code num-
ber is displayed.
40--
Push the number 3 preset button un-
til the third digit of the code number
is displayed.
43--
Push the number 4 preset button un-
til the fourth digit of the code num-
ber is displayed.
430-
Action Display
When you finish entering the code,
push the POWER button to accept
the code entered.
4359
If you enter the correct code, the radio will start as
normal in radio mode (TUNER). If you enter the wrong
code, the radio will remain locked until disconnected
from the power supply.
If the car radio power supply is disconnected for approxi-
mately eight seconds or longer, you will again be asked
for the security code when it is reconnected.
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
General
The radio offers the following features:
Radio (Tuner Mode)
• Automatic/Manual station tuning
• Manual storage of 30 stations: 18 in the FM band (6 in
FM1, 6 in FM2 and 6 in FM3), 6 in the AM1 band and
6 in the AM2 band
• Best stations memory
MP3/WMA/AAC (USB Mode)
• “Last position” memory
• MP3/WMA/AAC track selection (forward/reverse)
• MP3/WMA/AAC track fast forward/reverse
• (RND) RaNDom (music shuffle) function
General
• Separate BASS and TREBLE settings
• BALANCE/FADE (balances left/right and front/rear
channels)
• Equalizer
• Loudness
• Digital clock in 24-hour format with weekday setting
• Illuminated buttons and display
• LCD display
• Extended functions field (Setup MENU) allows you to
change the default settings
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
Uconnect® RH3 Display
Description Of Commands
Rotary Knob: Turn radio on and off, volume, forward/
reverse track, confirm selected option.
䉴䉴 And 䉳䉳 Buttons: Station search in automatic mode,
station search in manual mode, forward/reverse tracks,
forward/reverse within track.
Mute/Pause Button: Interrupts the sound by muting or
pausing the audio.
DISP Button: Switches between display modes, clock
display.
RND Button: Enables/Disables shuffle play.
SRC Button: Switches the audio source to TUNER.
Switches the audio source to USB.
Fast Track Buttons (F-Trk): Fast forward/reverse track
(used with the ROTARY knob).
Audio Button: Activates audio setting functions.
Preset Buttons (1 To 6): Store station in memory, access
preset stations.
RH3 Display Panel
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons 1 And 2: Forward/reverse folder.
Band/AS Button: Select tuned frequency band, preset
best stations.
Menu Button: Access setup menu.
General Functions And Settings
Turn The Radio On Or Off
To turn the radio on or off, push the ROTARY knob (push
once to turn on and hold for about three seconds to turn
off), not dependent on the ignition position.
The default radio configuration is “Auto Switch ON⬙ (see
SETUP MENU section). In this configuration, the radio
will follow two parameters: ignition and previous state. If
the ignition is turned off with the radio on, the radio will
be turned off, but will come on again when the ignition is
turned on. If the ignition is turned off with the radio off,
the radio continues to be turned off when the ignition is
turned on again.
If you prefer, you can set ⬙Auto Switch OFF⬙ (see SETUP
MENU section). The radio will only consider the ignition
switch position when it executes the 60 min function:
when the ignition is turned off, the radio will display the
message ⬙60 MIN⬙ for three seconds and switch off
automatically after 60 minutes if no buttons are pushed.
When it is turned on, the radio will display a greeting
message. When it is turned off, the radio will display the
message ⬙GOOD BYE⬙ before it switches off.
Audio
You can use the AUDIO button to access the available
audio settings (described in the sections below).
Equalizer
Pushing the AUDIO button for more than two seconds
activates the audio equalizer functions in the following
sequence: FLAT
POP ROCK CLASSIC
VOCAL JAZZ USER FLAT. Push AUDIO
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
repeatedly to change the equalization. If this button is
not pushed again within five seconds, or if you push
the ROTARY knob, the display returns to the previ-
ously selected view and the settings will be saved.
Custom Audio Setting Functions
Push the AUDIO button for less than two seconds to
activate the Balance function.
Repeatedly pushing the AUDIO button activates the
other custom audio setting functions in the following
sequence: Bass
Treble Balance Fader Loud-
ness
Bass. If this button is not pushed again within
five seconds, or if you push the ROTARY knob, the
display returns to the previously selected view and the
settings will be saved. USER equalization must be
selected to activate the Bass and Treble functions.
Bass
The display will show ⬙BASS 00⬙ to indicate that the Bass
function can be set. To increase the bass level, turn the
ROTARY knob clockwise. To decrease the bass level, turn
the ROTARY knob counterclockwise. The bass levels can
be set between -15 and 15.
Treble
The display will show ⬙TREB 00⬙ to indicate that the
Treble function can be set. To increase the treble level,
turn the ROTARY knob clockwise. To decrease the treble
level, turn the ROTARY knob counterclockwise. The
treble levels can be set between -15 and 15.
Balance
The display will show the message ⬙BAL 00⬙ to indicate
that the balance function can be set. Turn the ROTARY
knob clockwise to transfer the sound to the right-hand
side; the display will show ⬙BAL R 01⬙. Turn the ROTARY
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
knob counterclockwise to transfer the sound to the
left-hand side; the display will show ⬙BALL01⬙. The
balance levels can be set between 0 and 15.
Fader
The display will show ⬙FAD 00⬙ to indicate that you can
set the Fader function. Turn the ROTARY knob clockwise
to transfer the sound to the front; the display will show
⬙FADF01⬙. Turn the ROTARY knob counterclockwise to
transfer the sound to the back; the display will show
⬙FADR01⬙. The fader levels are set from 0 to 15.
Loudness
The display will show ⬙LOUD 00⬙ to indicate that you can
set the loudness (enhanced sound) function. Turn the
ROTARY knob clockwise to enable the loudness function
at level 1; the display will show ⬙LOUD 01⬙ and the
LOUD flag will be enabled. The radio supports three
loudness levels.
Volume
Turn the ROTARY knob clockwise to increase the vol-
ume. Turning it counterclockwise will lower the volume.
The volume can be set between 0 and 30.
Tuner Mode (AM/FM Radio)
When you enter TUNER mode, the radio tunes to the
most recently selected station and will remain on the
most recently selected frequency band.
In this mode of operation the display will show one of the
following 5 codes:
CH (Channel)
When this is on, it indicates that the current radio station
preset is stored in memory. The code is only shown when
the tuned frequency is showing on the display.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
ST (Stereo)
When this is on, it indicates the radio station is transmit-
ting.
Searching for Stations In Automatic Mode
When you push
or for less than two seconds, the
radio will search for the next valid station. While the
radio is searching for the new station, the display will
show ⬙SEEKING⬙. When the search is complete, the
display will show the tuned frequency band and
station in the format ⬙F1 106.9⬙ or, if the station was
previously stored in memory, the display will show
the channel where it is stored and the tuned station.
Searching for Stations In Manual Mode
Pushing
or for more than two seconds displays
the selected radio station frequency. Each time a
button is pushed, the radio station frequency is in-
creased or decreased according to the default search
pattern for the selected band (100 kHz for FM and 10k
Hz for AM). When the search button is pushed and
held, the radio station frequency will continue to be
increased or decreased. If the buttons are not pushed
for five seconds, the display will show the message
⬙AUTO⬙ and manual search mode will be canceled.
When the search is complete, the display will show the
tuned band and station in the format ⬙F1 106.9⬙,or,if
the station found was previously stored in memory,
the display will show the channel where it is stored
and the tuned station.
Mute/Pause
Pushing this button mutes the sound. The display will
switch between ⬙MUTE ON⬙ and the previous display
(3 seconds).
Pushing the button again restores the audio without
changing the original volume setting. The display will
show ⬙MUTE OFF⬙ for three seconds, and then return to
the previous display mode.
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the
or , Audio, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, BAND/AS
buttons and SRC are pushed in ⬙Mute/Paused⬙ mode,
these will be implemented and the audio will be
restored without changing the original volume.
Turn the ROTARY knob to restore the audio and change
the volume to the level selected. The display will show
the settings described in the volume function.
The other buttons should be implemented when pushed,
but the radio will remain in ⬙MUTE ON⬙ mode.
Storing Stations In Memory
Push and hold the memory buttons (1 through 6) for
more than two seconds to associate the tuned station
with the pushed button. The display will show a message
in ⬙MEMO 2⬙ format for three seconds to confirm that the
station has been tuned in. The CH signal is then activated
and the display will show the preset number and station
frequency for three seconds ⬙2 106.9⬙. The display will
then return to the previous view.
Accessing Preset Stations
When the preset buttons (1 through 6) are pushed for less
than two seconds the radio will tune in to the station
associated with that particular memory location. The
display shows the preset number and frequency of the
associated station for three seconds. The display will then
return to the previous view.
Retuning the band: When the BAND/AS button is
pushed for less than two seconds, the radio will alternate
between bands in the sequence: FM1
FM2 FM3
AM1 AM2 FM1. While changing bands from
the FM3 band to AM1, the display will show ⬙AM⬙
for two seconds and when changing from the AM2
band to
FM1, the display will show ⬙FM⬙ for two
seconds.
The display will then show the selected band and fre-
quency in the format ⬙F1 106.9⬙ for two seconds and then
return to the previous view.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
Presetting stations with a strong signal: when the
BAND/AS button is pushed for more than two seconds,
the radio will search for the 6 best stations and automati-
cally store them in the 6 memory positions of the current
band. During the search, the display will indicate ⬙FM AST⬙
or ⬙AM AST⬙, depending on the band selected. To record
the stations that are found, these are sorted in ascending
order of frequency and the first one is stored in memory
position 1, and so on, until positions 1-6 are all in use. If
fewer than 6 stations are found, the unused channels will
be allocated to the 107.9 MHz frequency for FM and AM
1710 KHz for the AM band. At the end of the search
process, the radio tunes in to the first preset position and
the display will indicate the associated preset number (1)
and the station frequency for three seconds. The display
will then return to the previous view.
Setup Menu
You can use the Setup menu to change the various factory
settings to suit your own preferences.
Push MENU to activate the Maximum Volume function.
Repeatedly pushing this button will activate the other
functions in the following sequence: Maximum Volume
(MVOL)
Auto Switch (AUTO) Beep (BEEP)
Set Clock Maximum Volume (MVOL). If this
button or the button for adjusting the selected function
is not pushed for five seconds or if the ROTARY knob
is pushed, the display returns to the previous view
and the changes will be saved.
Maximum Volume
This function allows you to set the maximum permissible
volume. Turn the ROTARY knob to set the volume. The
display will show a message in the format ⬙MVOL 26⬙
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
indicating the maximum volume selected. When the
maximum volume selected is the maximum radio vol-
ume, the display will show ⬙MVOL OFF⬙.
Auto Switch
This function changes the on/off sequence of the radio as
described in the section: ⬙Turning the device on and off.⬙
To enable it, turn the ROTARY knob clockwise. The
display will show ⬙AUTO ON⬙. To disable it, turn the
ROTARY knob counterclockwise and the display will
show ⬙AUTO OFF⬙.
Beep
With this feature is enabled, the radio will emit a beep
when any knob is activated.
Clock settings
When you select this function, the display will show the
clock. To select the field to be set, push
or . Turn
the ROTARY knob to adjust the selected field.
Clock
Pushing the DISP button for more than two seconds
enables or disables the clock display. When this feature is
enabled, the display shows ⬙CLK ON⬙ and the clock is
displayed whenever the ignition is switched on, even if
the radio is off. This function takes priority in the display
whenever you access any of the radio functions. If no
buttons are pushed within 10 seconds, the display will go
back to showing the clock. When this function is dis-
abled, the display shows ⬙CLK OFF⬙.
USB Mode (MP3/WMA/AAC)
CAUTION!
To remove devices connected to the USB port, first
select the other audio source. Failure to follow this
procedure can cause damage to the connected device.
(Continued)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
CAUTION! (Continued)
Due to the extensive range of makes and models of
storage devices available on the market, not all
devices have compatibility required for proper func-
tioning of Car Radios. Use only quality USB devices.
Due to the extensive range of brands and models of
storage devices available on the market, not all devices
are compatible with proper functioning of the car radio.
NOTE: The car radio is only compatible with USB mass
storage devices that are fully compatible with the USB 2.0
standard. Use quality USB devices only.
In USB mode, the radio plays MP3, WMA and AAC files
stored on the device connected to the USB port that is
located on the lower right side of the steering wheel on
the instrument panel.
To enter USB mode, you must push the SRC button.
When you enter USB mode, the display shows ⬙LOAD-
ING⬙ while the radio checks whether the connected
device is valid.
If there is no USB device, an invalid USB device, or a
valid device that is defective, the display will show ⬙ERR
USB⬙ for two seconds and the radio remains in TUNER
mode. If a valid device does not contain any playable
files (i.e. MP3, WMA or AAC), the display will show ⬙NO
MUSIC⬙ for two seconds and the radio remains in
TUNER mode.
If playable files are found, the radio will also check that
the connected device is the same as the one used imme-
diately before the USB function. If this is the case, music
playback will start from the point where it was inter-
rupted (file and music runtime). If not, the file played
will be the first valid file, in the sequence shown in the
following example:
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
File Sequence
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
Play Sequence (File) Comments
1 Track 1_1 If there are MP3, WMA or AAC (extensions mp3, wma, m4a, mp4 and 3gp)
files in the root folder, these will be played first.
2 Track 2_1 Folders within the same level are sorted in ascending order by name (up to
folder number 100, after which the order follows that in which they were re-
corded on the USB device).
3 Track 3_1
4 Track 4_1
5 Track 4_2
6 Track 5_1 Files within a folder are sorted in ascending order by name (up to file number
100, thereafter, the order follows that in which they were recorded on the USB
device).
7 Track 5_2
8 Track 5_3
9 Track 5_4
10 Track 6_1
Forward/Reverse Track
When you push
for less than two seconds, the radio
will advance to the next audio file on the device. When
you push
for less than two seconds, the radio will
skip back to the beginning of the track. If this button is
pushed again, the radio will skip back to the previous
audio file on the device.
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When these buttons are pushed, the display will show a
⬙TRKyyy⬙ message, where yyy is the track number. If any
of these buttons is briefly pushed again, the number in
the display will continue changing according to the
selected track. While the track is being selected, that is,
when
or are pushed briefly, the information
contained in the ID3 tag will not be processed (the ID3
tag can store information such as the title, artist,
album, track number, etc.). If neither
or are
pushed down and held, the track will be selected and
the ID3 tag will be processed and begin playing. In
this case, the display will show ⬙TRKyyy⬙ for two
seconds and then return to the DISP function view.
Whenever the radio switches from one folder to
another, the display will show the name of the folder
you are moving to for at least 500 ms (seek button
movements are ignored during this time), and no
longer than three seconds.
When you reach the final song in the last folder and push
again, the radio will advance to the first song in the
first folder on the USB device. When you reach the
first song in the first folder and push
again, the
radio will advance to the final song in the last folder
on the USB device.
Forward/Reverse Along The Track:
When
or is pushed for more than two seconds,
the radio will reverse or forward the music for as long
as the button is held down. The display shows the
runtime of the music in the format ⬙003 01:32⬙ (track
number and runtime). When the operation is com-
pleted, the display will continue to display the music
runtime for two seconds. After that it returns to the
previous view.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
Mute/Pause
Pushing this knob stops music playback and mutes the
sound. The display will switch between ⬙PAUSED⬙ and
the current view (three seconds).
Push this button again to resume music playback from
the point where it left off, without changing the original
volume level. The display will show ⬙PLAY⬙ for three
seconds. It then returns to the previous mode.
When
or , Audio, 1, 2, and SRC are pushed in
⬙Mute/Paused⬙ mode, playback (where applicable)
will resume and the sound will be restored without
changing the original volume level.
Turn the ROTARY knob to resume playing the music and
change the volume accordingly. The display will feature
the information described in the volume function.
Pushing the F-TRACK button will not resume play, but
using the (F-TRK + rotation) function will start or resume
play.
The other buttons should be implemented when pushed,
but the radio will remain in ⬙Mute/Paused⬙ mode.
Fast Track: Pushing the F-TRK button activates FAST
TRACK mode and the display will show the name of the
current folder. If the ROTARY knob is not activated, the
radio returns to its previous state.
If the ROTARY knob is turned, the display shows the
⬙TRKyyy⬙ message, where yyy is the track number.
Turning the knob clockwise will forwards the tracks and
turning it counterclockwise will reverse the tracks. While
this is being performed, the information contained in the
ID3 tag is not processed. As the knob is turned, the
⬙TRKyyy⬙ message changes to the track selected.
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the ROTARY knob is pushed or if its position is not
changed for five seconds, the track is selected, the ID3 tag
is processed and the music will start playing. In this case,
the display will show the ⬙TRKyyy⬙ message for two
seconds and then return to the default display defined by
the DISP function.
When the radio skips from one folder to another, the
display will show the name of the folder to which you are
moving for a few milliseconds (the rotary movements are
ignored during this period) and a maximum of three
seconds. When you reach the final track in the last folder
and turn the ROTARY knob clockwise, the radio will
advance to the first track in the first folder on the USB
device. When you reach the first track in the first folder
and turn the ROTARY knob counterclockwise, the radio
will advance to the last track in the last folder on the USB
device.
Forward/Reverse Folder
When you push the memory 1 button, the radio will
advance to the first track in the next folder containing
audio files, if you push button 2, the radio will return to
the first track in the previous folder containing audio
files.
When this operation is complete, the display shows the
name of the selected folder. If you push any of these
buttons again quickly, the name shown is updated as you
select folders on the USB device. While the track is being
selected, that is, when you push buttons 1 or 2 quickly,
the information contained in ID3 tag is not processed. If
you do not push and hold 1 or 2, the track is selected, the
ID3 tag is processed and the music will start playing. In
this case, the display will continue showing the name of
the selected folder for two seconds and then return to the
default display defined by the DISP function.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
Whenever the radio skips from one folder to another, the
display will show the name of the folder to which you are
going for a few milliseconds (the rotary movements are
ignored during this period) and a maximum of three
seconds. When you reach the last folder and push Button
1 again, the radio will advance to the next folder on the
USB device. When you reach the first folder and push
Button 2 again, the radio will advance to the next folder
on the USB device.
Shuffle (Random Playback)
Pushing the RND button enables or disables the ⬙shuffle⬙
feature. When enabled, the RND indicator is switched on
and the display will show ⬙RND ON⬙ for two seconds.
The display will then revert to the previous view.
When you push this button again, the function is dis-
abled, the RND indicator is turned off and the display
will show ⬙RND OFF⬙ for two seconds. The display then
reverts to the previous view.
If the RND function is enabled, the music forward/
reverse will be random, both in normal mode and Fast
Track mode. In this case, Buttons 1 and 2 (forward/
reverse folder) have the exact same function as
or
(music forward/reverse), respectively.
Switching Between Display Modes
When you push the DISP button for less than two
seconds, information about the track being played will
alternate in the following sequence: Track
Time
Title Album Artist File Folder
Track. At the first touch of the button, the display
now shows the information type related to the track
being played, for example, if the current information is
track, the display will show ⬙TIME⬙. If you push any
other buttons or if the DISP button is not pushed for
two seconds, the information type that is on the
display will be selected. When the file that is being
played does not contain the selected information, the
radio will display ⬙NO NAME.⬙
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allows you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing
so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Uconnect® 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect®
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect® system may also have a Screen Off and
Back buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect® screen. Push the Screen Off button on the
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back button on the faceplate to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect® system.
Uconnect® 5.0N Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® display.
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings
Push the Settings button on the faceplate to display the
menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect® system
allows you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Clock & Date, Safety & Driv-
ing Assistance (if equipped), Lights, Doors & Locks,
Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup (if
equipped), Restore Settings (if equipped).
NOTE:
• Only one category may be selected at a time.
• The Back arrow will change into a Done button if any
changes are made.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting. Once the
setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button
on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to
return to the previous menu or press the X button on the
touchscreen to return to the Main Settings screen. Press-
ing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the touchscreen on
the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Display Mode
Press the display mode button to set the display bright-
ness according to day, night or auto condition. In auto
mode the display brightness is aligned to that of the
instrument panel.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This feature allows you to select the display brightness
when the headlights are on. Adjust the brightness with
the ⬙Up⬙ or ⬙Down⬙ arrow buttons on the touchscreen.
Then press the back arrow/Done button on the touch-
screen, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Display Brightness With the Headlights Off
This feature allows you to select the display brightness
when the headlights are off. Adjust the brightness with
the ⬙Up⬙ or ⬙Down⬙ arrow buttons on the touchscreen.
Then press the back arrow/Done button on the touch-
screen, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Set Language
This feature allows you to select one of multiple lan-
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the Set Language button on the touchscreen, then press
the desired language button. The button will highlight
showing that setting has been selected. Press the arrow
back/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Touchscreen Beep
This feature allows you to turn on or shut off the sound
heard when a button on the touchscreen is pressed. To
make your selection, press the “Touchscreen Beep” but-
ton on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The
button will highlight indicating that the setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Display Trip B
Press the relevant button to activate/deactivate the dis-
playing of the Trip B on the instrument panel display.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Units — If Equipped
Press the Units button to select the correct unit for
Temperature (°F or °C), Distance (mi or km) and Fuel
Consumption. If the distance is in mi (miles), miles per
gallon (mpg) are set automatically. If the distance
is km, km/1 or 1/100km can be selected.
• Voice Response Length
This feature allows you to change the Voice Response
Length settings. To change the Voice Response Length,
press the Brief or Detailed button on the touchscreen The
button will highlight showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Clock & Date
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Sync Time With GPS
This feature allows you to automatically have the radio
set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press the
“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen. The
button will highlight showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the
back button on the faceplate.
• Set Time Hours
This feature allows you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the ⬙Up⬙ or
⬙Down⬙ arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the
hours up or down. Press the back arrow/Done button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press
the ”X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
• Set Time Minutes
This feature allows you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync
with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the ⬙Up⬙ or
⬙Down⬙ arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the
minutes up or down. Press the back arrow/Done button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or
press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of
the settings screen.
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
This feature allows you to choose to show the time in the
Status bar. To change the Time in Status Bar setting, press
the “Show Time in Status Bar” button. The button will
highlight showing that setting has been selected. Press
the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
• Time and Format
This feature will allow you to set the time and choose the
format to display the time. Press the 12h/24h AM and/or
PM button on the touchscreen. The button will highlight
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu. If 24h is selected, the AM/PM buttons on
the touchscreen will be greyed out (unavailable).
• Set Date
This feature will allow you to set the date manually. Press
the Set Date button on the touchscreen and using the
“Up” and “Down” arrows, set the date. Press the back
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera Static Guidelines that allows you to see
straight grid line overlay over the ParkView® Back up
camera display whenever the shift lever is put into
REVERSE and/or the rear hatch is opened. The image
will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along
with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across
the top of the screen. When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE and the rear hatch is closed the rear view
image will display for no more than ten seconds and after
the radio screen will appear.
To make your selection, press the ParkView® Rear Back
Up Camera button on the touchscreen, until a check-
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting
had been selected. Press the arrow back/Done button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView®
Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for
up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (13 km/h).
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the Daytime Running Lights button on the touch-
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indi-
cating that the setting has been selected. Press the arrow
back/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
• Auto Door Locks
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto
Lock” button on the touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or
“No.” The button will highlight indicating that the set-
ting has been selected. Press the back arrow/Done button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
• Balance
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance settings.
Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows to adjust,
or tap the speaker icon to readjust to the center.
• Equalizer
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the “–” or “+” arrow
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the Up and Down arrow buttons on the
touchscreen. Then press the back arrow/Done button on
the touchscreen.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
press the Off, 1, 2 or 3 button on the touchscreen. Then
press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen.
• Loudness — If Equipped
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
touchscreen, then choose “On” or “Off.” The button will
highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen
when done.
• Auto - On Radio
Press the Auto On Radio button on the touchscreen to set
how the radio behaves when the Ignition is switched to
On. The options are: ON, Off or Recall Last. Press the
back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen when done.
• AUX Volume Offset
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3
followed by pressing the back arrow/Done button on the
touchscreen.
• Radio Off Delay
Press the Radio Off Delay to keep the radio On for a
preset amount of time after the Ignition is switched Off.
Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen
when done.
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Paired Phones
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
• Paired Audio Sources
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available:
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking
⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
select Yes to restore, or Cancel to exit. Once the settings
are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings reset to
default.⬙ Press the okay button on the touchscreen to exit.
Uconnect® RADIOS
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The USB Port and Auxiliary Jack is located on the
instrument panel left of the radio (driver’s lower right).
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
USB Port And AUX Jack
1 — USB Port 2 — AUX Audio Jack
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® Supple-
ment Manual.
USB Charging Port
The USB connector port can be used for charging pur-
poses only. Use the connection cable to connect an iPod®
or external USB device to the vehicle’s USB charging port
which is located next to the 12V power outlet near the
cup holder on passenger side.
NOTE: If the device battery to be charged is completely
depleted, it may take awhile to charge.
Passenger Compartment USB Charging Port
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in a collision.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the
surface of the steering wheel.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch and con-
trols the SCAN functions of the sound system.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch and controls
the volume of the sound system plus a button to mute the
Sound System.
Remote Sound System Controls
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
The following describes the right-hand control operation
in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Scan” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Scan” down for the next listenable station.
CD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g, scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized,
or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc
before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone. This condition is not
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the phone, it
is recommended that the radio volume be turned down
or off during mobile phone operation when not using
Uconnect® (if equipped).
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
Manual Temperature Controls
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
three outer rotary dials (blower speed, temperature and
mode) and three inner push buttons (Recirculation, A/C,
Rear Window Defroster).
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ven-
tilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(OFF) position. There are seven blower
speeds.
Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures, while rotating
right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt
or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Conditioning Control
Push this button to engage the Air
Conditioning. A light will illuminate
when the Air Conditioning system is
engaged. Rotating the dial left into the
blue area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures, while rotating right into
the red area indicates warmer
temperatures.
• Economy Mode
If economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
select Panel, Bi-Level or Floor mode and move the
temperature control to the desired temperature.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to choose from sev-
eral patterns of air distribution. You
can select either a primary mode as
identified by the symbols on the con-
trol, or a blend of two of these modes.
The closer the setting is to a particular
symbol, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
• Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
airflow.
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
• Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot,
there is a difference in temperature between the upper
and lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor
outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during
sunny but cool conditions.
• Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demist outlets.
• Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
• Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix,
Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pushed. This dehu-
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
Recirculation Control
Pushing the Recirculation Control button will
put the system in recirculation mode. This can
be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are pres-
ent. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the
control button to illuminate.
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the
inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Ex-
tended use of this mode is not recommended.
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside, because
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside
air position for maximum defogging.
Recirculated air is not allowed in Defrost modes. If the
Recirculation button is pushed while in Defrost mode,
the LED indicator will flash several times then go out.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically when De-
frost mode is selected.
If the following conditions are verified:
• Mode Floor, Vent or Bi level selected.
• Temperature in Max Cold.
• A/C led ON.
• Hot Ambient Temperature.
• Blower at Maximum speed.
• In case of hot ambient temperature, the recirculation is
closed (opened for a minute each 15 minutes so the air
can be changed) to improve the vehicle cooling.
Rear Window Defrosting
Push the Rear Defrost button to activate heated rear
window defrosting.
This function switches OFF automatically after about 20
minutes or when the engine is turned OFF. It is not
switched on automatically the next time the engine is
started.
If equipped, push the Rear Defrost button to activate
defrosting of door mirrors and heated nozzles.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
NOTE: Do not affix stickers to the inside of the heated
rear window over the heating filaments, to avoid damage
that might cause them to stop working properly.
Additional Rear Climate Control — If Equipped
This switch, mounted on the instrument panel to the left
of the steering column, activates the additional rear
heating/air conditioning system vent.
NOTE: The switch must be enabled for operation by the
Upfitter.
Additional Rear Climate Control Switch
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® 5.0 VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect®
Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0
system.
Key Features:
• 5.0” Full Color Touchscreen Display
• Bluetooth® With Integrated Voice Control
• GPS Navigation (If Equipped)
Get Started
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing in-
structions.
Uconnect® 5.0
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-
versations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or PHONE button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or PHONE button and saying a
Voice Command from current category.
All you need to control your Uconnect® system with
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
VR And Phone Buttons
1 — Push To MUTE
2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-
ceive A Text
3 — Push To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
4 — Push To End Call
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect® system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio® stations you would like to hear. (Sub-
scription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial re-
quired.)
Uconnect® 5.0
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Media
Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth®
and Auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Uconnect® 5.0 Radio
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth®
• Change source to iPod®
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
TIP: Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to see
all of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
song and genre information is displayed.
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push
the PHONE button
and say Listen. (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® sys-
tem.)
Uconnect® 5.0 Media
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
the PHONE button
. After the beep, say... “Re-
ply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep,
repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the
system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No. Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be <num-
ber> minutes
late.
Call me. Are you there
yet?
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
I’ll call you
later.
I need direc-
tions.
See you in
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-
tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-
tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later sup-
ports reading incoming text messages only.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Additional Information
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
Uconnect® System Support:
• DriveUconnect.com
• U.S. residents call 1-877-855-8400
• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
Mon. – Fri., 7:00 am – 12:00 am, ET
Sat., 8:00 am – 10:00 pm, ET
Sun., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ................200
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .....200
▫ Normal Starting.......................200
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) ................201
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................201
▫ After Starting ........................201
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .202
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............202
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock...............203
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .204
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission .........204
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........213
▫ Acceleration .........................213
▫ Traction ............................214
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............214
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................215
▫ Shallow Standing Water .................215
䡵 POWER STEERING .....................216
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ..............217
5
䡵 PARKING BRAKE ......................218
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................220
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .220
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .220
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............222
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............223
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........224
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..............227
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................228
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............230
▫ Tire Markings ........................230
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........233
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........235
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........236
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........240
▫ Tire Pressure ........................240
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................241
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .243
▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................243
▫ Tire Types ...........................244
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............245
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............246
▫ Tire Spinning ........................248
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................249
▫ Life Of Tire .........................250
▫ Replacement Tires .....................250
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......252
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....253
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) ..............................254
▫ Base System .........................257
▫ General Information ...................259
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................260
▫ 3.6L Engine ..........................260
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................260
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............261
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......261
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................262
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................262
▫ Fuel System Cautions...................262
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............263
䡵 ADDING FUEL ........................264
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............264
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............266
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING ....................266
▫ Vehicle Certification Label ...............266
䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................269
▫ Common Towing Definitions .............269
▫ Towing Tips .........................280
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................281
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .281
▫ Recreational Towing — Automatic
Transmission .........................282
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selec-
tor.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Press the brake
pedal before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START)
position and release it when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition
switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• To prevent damage to the starter, do not continu-
ously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at
a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.
(Continued)
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
Once the key is removed, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against un-
wanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
OFF (key removal) position. The key can only be re-
moved from the ignition when the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF position, and once removed the transmission
is locked in PARK.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not), and the
brake pedal must be pressed.
NOTE: Swivel seats that are unlocked can also prevent
the transmission shift lever from being moved out of the
PARK position. To shift the transmission out of the PARK
position the first time after the cranking is allowed,
ensure swivel seats are locked in forward facing position.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever
out of PARK (Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Inter-
lock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the ERS
shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation” in this section for further information). Mov-
ing the shift lever into the ERS (-/+) position (beside the
DRIVE position) displays the current gear in the instru-
ment cluster, and prevents automatic upshifts beyond
this gear. In ERS mode, toggling the shift lever forward (-)
or rearward (+) will change the highest available gear.
NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed for-
ward) it is probably in the ERS (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In ERS mode, the transmission gear
limit (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Move the shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D]
position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
Shift Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-
cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade, and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
gear selector/shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key.
Once the key is removed, the transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against un-
wanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With the brake pedal released, verify the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), select Tow/Haul mode or
use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer
to ⬙Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation⬙ in this
section for further information) to select a lower gear
range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range
will improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold tempera-
tures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to third gear only. Normal operation will resume
once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to oper-
ate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illu-
minated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
aging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear. For example, if
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
you set the transmission gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the
transmission will not shift above fourth gear, but will
shift through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Moving the shift
lever to the ERS position (beside DRIVE) will activate
ERS mode, display the current gear in the instrument
cluster, and set that gear as the top available gear. Once in
ERS mode, moving the shift lever forward (-) or rearward
(+) will change the top available gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply return the shift lever to the
DRIVE position.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Instrument
Cluster Display
123456D
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
1 1–2 1–3 1–4 1–5 1–6 1–6
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), move the shift lever into
the ERS position, then tap it forward (-) repeatedly as the
vehicle slows. The transmission will shift to the range
from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con-
ditions are present:
• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
perature.
• The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera-
ture.
• The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/
HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce
the potential for transmission overheating or failure due
to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL
mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the trans-
mission will automatically downshift (for engine brak-
ing) during steady braking maneuvers.
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode
has been activated. Pushing the switch a second time
restores normal operation. Normal operation is always
the default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is
desired, the switch must be pushed each time the engine
is started.
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
• The torque converter clutch will not engage, until the
transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usu-
ally after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmis-
sion is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is
normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm,
will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift
into and out of Overdrive.
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans-
mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque con-
verter will refill within five seconds after starting the
engine.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
CAUTION! (Continued)
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied.
The parking brake lever is located on the outboard side of
the drivers seat. To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up as firmly as possible. To release the parking
brake, pull the lever up slightly, push the release button
with your thumb, then lower the lever completely.
Parking Brake
1 — Parking Brake Release Button
2 — Parking Brake Lever
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake
Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave a manual transmis-
sion in REVERSE or first (1st) gear. Failure to do so
may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still func-
tion. However, there will be some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System
Warning Light”.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Traction Control
System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS) and Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), Trailer Sway Control (TSC), and
Hill Start Assist (HSA). These systems complement the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by optimizing the vehicle
braking capability during emergency braking maneu-
vers.
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con-
ditions. The system operates with a separate computer to
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up
and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When
the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The
system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning
the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the
fault detected was only momentary.
WARNING!
• Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow
down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving the
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the
system reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a
pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise.
These occurrences are normal and indicate that the
system is functioning properly.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount
of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin
is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping
wheel(s) and engine power is reduced, to provide en-
hanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS
system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions simi-
lar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if the ESC is in the
“Partial Off” mode.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (in
the instrument cluster) will start to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the wheels begin to spin. This
indicates that the TCS is active. If the indicator light
flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator
and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt
your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions,
and do not switch off the ESC or TCS.
WARNING!
• The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded.
(Continued)
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• The TCS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydro-
planing.
• The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize
the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency brak-
ing maneuvers. The system detects an emergency brak-
ing situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake
application, and then applies optimum pressure to the
brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the
brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances direc-
tional control and stability of the vehicle under various
driving conditions. ESC corrects for over/under steering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
all accidents, including those resulting from exces-
sive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-
priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Operating Modes
The “ESC Off” switch is located in the center
switch bank, next to the hazard flasher switch.
ESC On
This mode is the normal operating mode for ESC
equipped vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is started, the
ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be
used for most driving situations. ESC should only be
turned off for specific reasons as noted below.
ESC Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pushing the “ESC
Off” switch.
When in the “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC,
except for the “limited slip” feature described in the TCS
section, has been disabled and the “ESC OFF Indicator
Light” will be illuminated. When in the “Partial Off”
mode, ESC will operate without engine torque manage-
ment. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in
deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel
spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain
traction. To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On”
mode of operation.
WARNING!
• When in ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de-
scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the ⴖESC Off Indicator Lightⴖ will be illuminated.
When in ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
WARNING! (Continued)
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys-
tem is reduced.
• Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the ⴖPartial Offⴖ mode.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pushing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situa-
tion requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pushing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should turn off with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro-
priate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop
all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when
towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight
recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in this sec-
tion for further information. When TSC is functioning,
the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will
flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may
feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled
when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for brak-
ing the vehicle.
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
• HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK
and using the parking brake, it will roll down the
hill and could cause a collision with another ve-
hicle or object. Always remember to use the park-
ing brake while parking on a hill, and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation
5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Tire And Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in overheating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
At least once a month:
•
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judge-
ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
this manual for more information relating to the Load
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Front Tires Only
• Tire chains for a 225/75R16 tire with a Quality Chain
Corp Light Truck Highway Service (Non-Cam) tire
chain or equivalent is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold tire pressure.
Tire Rotation
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven, this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire
pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives
the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of
30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires
are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pres-
sure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to your an authorized dealership to
have your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module.
• Five Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be
activated, and the “Check tire pressure” text message will
display when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. The system
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures
have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive
this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Unavailable” text message
will display. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
will repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
with any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a regular size
spare wheel.
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. The spare tire has a tire pressure monitoring sensor,
but it is not monitored until it is mounted in place of
any of the existing four road tires.
2. If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound
and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
turn ON due to the low tire condition. Then, after
driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15mph
(24km/h), the system will recognize the new sensor, so
turn off the telltale.
3. If a spare tire not equipped with tire pressure moni-
toring sensor is used, then the Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light will turn ON, flashing for 75 seconds
and then remaining solid for each subsequent ignition
key cycle.
NOTE: For a correct Tire Pressure Monitoring behavior,
please wait for about 20 minutes in key-off during each
tire substitution.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these en-
gines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability prob-
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-
nate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than
10% ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
formance and damage the emissions control sys-
tem.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
(Continued)
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
WARNING! (Continued)
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
COPYRIGHT ©2016 FCA US LLC
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap. A poorly fitting cap could let
(Continued)
Fuel Filler Cap
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
impurities into the fuel system and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on,
due to fuel vapors escaping from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the MIL to turn on.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL may
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check fuel cap” message will be displayed in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound is
heard. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
properly tightened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic Sys-
tem” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
If the problem continues, the message will appear the
next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the
specified GVWR and GAWR.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWRs.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight
is 10% to 15% of the vehicle’s GTW for a conventional
hitch. You must consider this as part of the load on your
vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric-
tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-
ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi-
mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
• ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
• ramtruck.ca (Canada)
• rambodybuilder.com
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
WARNING! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
lized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
Trailer Electrical Connector Location
1 — Four-Pin Connector Location
2 — Seven-Pin Connector Location
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL
mode or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic
Range Select [ERS] shift control).
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
Tow/Haul Mode
To reduce the potential for automatic transmission over-
heating, activate the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driv-
ing in hilly areas, or select a lower gear range (using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control) on more
severe grades.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE: When recreationally towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact
state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with diesel engine, see
important information in the Diesel Supplement.
Recreational Towing — Automatic Transmission
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmis-
sion in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires tow-
ing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the
ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........285
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............285
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................286
▫ Torque Specifications ...................287
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .........288
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage .................288
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .289
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions..........290
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit .........292
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..........298
▫ Jack Location.........................298
▫ Removing The Spare Tire ................299
▫ Preparations .........................303
▫ Jacking Instructions ....................304
▫ Wheel Covers ........................313
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ...........313
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ..............314
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ................316
▫ Battery Location ......................318
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
speed while maintaining the motion of the vehicle
with the brakes.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 285
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
286 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
145 Ft-Lbs (197 N·m) M16 x 1.50 21 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Wheel Mounting Surface
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 287
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to
approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located under the passenger seat.
Torque Patterns
288 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and
to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6)
when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on the
bottom side of the Tire Service Kit)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 289
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
290 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4
inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 291
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immedi-
ately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
292 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition
in the OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 293
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70
psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is
empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
294 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
ment panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 295
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3.
Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw
the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
296 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
ment”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 297
the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front
passenger seat.
298 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Removing The Spare Tire
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
vehicle. Attach the lug bolt adapter to the winch
extension and insert it into the winch mechanism.
Jack Location Jack Tools
1 — Winch Extension
2 — Lug Bolt Adapter
3 — Wrench Handle
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 299
The winch mechanism is located under the rear of the
vehicle to the right of the spare tire.
2. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise
until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable
slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
Winch Location Winch Extension
300 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the winch extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and can damage
the winch.
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain
access to the spare tire retainer.
Lowering Spare Tire
Spare Tire
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 301
4. Remove the retainer nut prior to removing the retainer
from the wheel.
5. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to
tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.
Retainer Nut Lifting Spare Tire
302 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
Preparations
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake firmly.
4. Set an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual
transmission in REVERSE.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For ex-
ample, if changing the right front tire,
block the left rear wheel.
Retainer
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 303
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
304 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug bolts by
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the vehicle body.
Jack Warning Label
Assembled Jack
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 305
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
NOTE: The rear jacking location is located in front of the
rear tire and in front of the leaf spring mount.
NOTE: The front jacking location is located behind the
front tire and in front of the driver/passenger door.
Jacking Engagement Locations
Rear Jacking Location
306 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
3. Place the wrench handle and lug bolt adapter on the
jack screw and turn to the right until the jack head is
properly engaged in the described location. Do not
raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the wrench handle and lug bolt adapter. Raise
the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and
enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire.
Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.
Front Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 307
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel lug bolts. For vehicles with wheel
covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do
not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the
hub.
6. Install the spare tire. Lightly tighten the wheel lug
bolts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Mounting Spare Tire
308 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the spare tire.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8. Refer to “Torque Specifications” in this section for
proper wheel lug bolt torque.
9. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
10. Stow the damaged wheel/spare tire with the cable
and wheel spacer before driving the vehicle.
11. Install the winch extension and rotate the wrench
handle clockwise until the winch mechanism indi-
cation window turns yellow and the operator hears
“3 clicks” from the device to show the wheel is
properly stowed under the vehicle.
Winch Mechanism Properly Engaged (Yellow DOT Will
Appear In The Winch Indication Window)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 309
CAUTION!
In the case that the yellow dot does not appear in the
winch mechanism window refer to step 11 above, the
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
operator should repeat the spare tire instillation
procedure. If the yellow dot does not appear in the
winch indication window, place and secure the dam-
aged wheel into the vehicle and seek dealer assis-
tance to the winch mechanism.
12. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools
back in the storage compartment.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Winch Mechanism NOT Properly Engaged
(Black Window Will Appear)
310 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
13. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible.
Correct the tire pressure, as required.
For vehicles with aluminum wheels:
1. Remove the adapter bracket and bolts from the storage
bag in the glove compartment.
2. Take the retainer and position it inside the circular
bracket.
3. Tighten the knob on the bolt to secure it to the bracket.
Adapter/Bracket Union
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 311
4. Position the tire vertically and lay the mounted
adapter on the inner part of the rim. Using the
supplied bolts, fasten the wheel to the adapter using
the bolt install wrench. Tighten the bolts with the
wrench extension and wrench handle.
Securing The Bracket Alloy Wheel Mounting
312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Follow the steps above for proper spare tire stowage.
Wheel Covers
CAUTION!
Use a back-and-forth motion to remove the hub cap.
Do not use a twisting motion when removing the hub
cap, damage to the hub cap finish may occur.
The wheel covers on the vehicle are held in place by the
wheel lug bolts and can be removed after the wheel lug
bolts are taken off.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
Wheel/Bolts Attaching To Mounting Bracket
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The vehicle’s jump starting remote posts are located
under the hood, in the engine compartment on the
driver’s side.
The Remote Positive (+) Post is covered with a protective
cap located on the side of the Front Power Distribution
Center.
The Remote Negative (-) Post is located on the core
support closest to the front of the vehicle.
314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
Jump Starting Remote Post Locations
A — Remote Positive (+) Post
B — Remote Negative (-) Post
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: The remote positive (+) post is located in the
engine compartment on the driver’s side under the cover
of the Front Power Distribution Center.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the discharged
vehicle.
NOTE: The remote negative (-) post is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the driver’s side.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery. Let the engine idle a few minutes and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, disconnect the jumper
cables in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive end (+) of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the dis-
charged vehicle.
5. Close the cover of the Front Power Distribution Cen-
ter.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
Battery Location
There are two remote jump starting posts under the hood
which is the recommended jump start location. If access
to the battery is needed, an access panel on the driver’s
side floor will allow for battery access.
Access Panel
318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE , while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
Battery Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control System” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the
⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck. And do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
shift lever override access cover which is located
below the shift lever.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5.
Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access port,
and push and hold the override release lever forward.
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the
Ground
ALL Models
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h) max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
Wheel Lift or Dolly
Tow
Rear
Front OK
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, see “Shift Lever Override” in this section for
instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of
PARK for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
Automatic Transmission
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis-
sion is operable, this vehicle may be towed (with front
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km), tow with the front wheels OFF the ground
(using a flatbed truck, or wheel lift equipment with the
front wheels raised).
CAUTION!
• Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km) with front wheels on the ground
can cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L ..........327
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .328
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............328
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS .............329
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................330
䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................331
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........331
▫ Engine Oil ..........................332
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................335
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................335
▫ Exhaust System ......................336
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............338
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............339
▫ Body Lubrication .....................342
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ...............342
▫ Cooling System ......................344
▫ Brake System ........................349
▫ Automatic Transmission (3.6L Gasoline Engine
Only) ..............................351
7
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................353
▫ Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders . .360
䡵 FUSES ..............................361
▫ Underhood Fuses......................362
▫ Interior Fuses ........................368
▫ Right Central Pillar Fuses ................372
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE ....................373
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS .................374
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ..................376
▫ Headlamps Low Beam And High beam .....376
▫ Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamps .........377
▫ Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)/Front Side
Marker Lamp ........................378
▫ Front Fog Lamps ......................379
▫ Front, Rear Roof Lamps .................379
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Backup, Turn Signal And Rear
Side Marker Lamps ....................379
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................380
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS ..............................381
▫ Engine .............................381
▫ Chassis ............................383
326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Washer Solvent Reservoir 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Coolant Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Power Steering Reservoir
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check fuel cap” message will be displayed in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in ”Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is
an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened.
Push the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If
the problem persists, the message will appear the next
time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system
will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the
MIL light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when
the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainte-
nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut OFF.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration, or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA US
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®, Shell
Helix® or equivalent is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
partment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: MOPAR® SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to
FCA US Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil®,
Shell Helix® or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20
engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet in the
engine compartment. Perform the following procedure to
replace the filter:
1. Remove the two screws that secure the filter retainer to
the fresh air inlet, and remove the filter retainer.
340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove and replace the A/C air filter from the filter
retainer.
Accessing Air Filter
1 — Screw Locations
2 — Fresh Air Inlet
Removing Air Filer
1 — Fresh Air Inlet
2 — A/C Air Filter
3 — A/C Air Filter Retainer
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341
3. Install the A/C air filter/filter retainer back into the
fresh air inlet. When installing the filter retainer make
sure the retainer is fully engaged.
4. Install the two screws back into the assembly to secure
the filter retainer to the fresh air inlet.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment
and should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
flush out any residual water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. MOPAR® All
Weather Windshield Washer Solution or equivalent, used
with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning
action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging,
and is not harmful to paint or trim.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at anytime the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) only by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-
terial Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34° F
(−37° C) are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is ad-
equate. With engine off and cold, the level of the engine
coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the
“MIN” and “MAX” marks.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
sions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing underhood services, or immediately if
the “Brake System Warning Light” indicates system
failure.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
(Continued)
350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission (3.6L Gasoline Engine
Only)
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351
CAUTION! (Continued)
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifica-
tions.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is
provided. Your authorized dealer can check your trans-
mission fluid level using a special service dipstick. If you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit
your authorized dealer immediately to have the trans-
mission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with
an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission
damage.
352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans-
mission is disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint
and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Instrument Panel Surfaces
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
use protectants or other products which may cause
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357
Cleaning Interior Trim
Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR® Total Clean or equiva-
lent, then MOPAR® Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent to
clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
CAUTION!
• Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
• Do not use power washers to clean the inside of the
vehicle, plastic parts can be permanently damaged
and the amount of water can cause problems with
the electrical components of your vehicle.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-
age than glass headlights.
358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders
Removal
Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer starting
at one edge to ease removal.
Cleaning
The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may follow
the cleaning procedure below.
Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and
one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for
approximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, pull the
liner from the water and dip it back into the water about
six times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse
the liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake
the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces
with a clean soft cloth.
360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Installation
Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and push the
liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the
corresponding openings in the drawer.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
age.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361
Underhood Fuses
The Front Power Distribution Center is located on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment. To access the
fuses, remove the cover.
The ID number of the electrical component correspond-
ing to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
Front Power Distribution Center
362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 40 Amp Orange Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Pump
F02 20 Amp Yellow
(3.6 Gasoline Engine)
Starter Relay 3.6L (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F02 50 Amp Red
(3.0 Diesel Engine)
Glow Plug Unit (3.0 Diesel Engine)
F04 50 Amp Red
(3.6 Gasoline Engine)
Secondary Power Distribution Center (PDC)
(Trans Power Relay, Vacuum Pump, KL30 for the
Shifter Transmission Module [STM]) (3.6 Gasoline
Engine)
F04 40 Amp Orange
(3.0 Diesel Engine)
Fuel Filter Heater (3.0 Diesel Engine)
F05 30 Amp Green SELESPEED Pump RELE (3.0 Diesel Engine) - If
Equipped
F06 40 Amp Orange
(non A/C)
60 Amp Blue (A/C)
Engine Cooling Fan - 2nd Speed
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F07 50 Amp Red
(non A/C)
60 Amp Blue (A/C)
Engine Cooling Fan - 1st Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange Passenger Compartment Blower
F09 15 Amp Blue Rear Power Outlet
F10 15 Amp Blue Horn
F11 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pressure Regulator (MPROP)-DRV (3.0 Diesel
Engine) — If Equipped
F14 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet
F15 7.5 Amp Brown USB Charger
F16 7.5 Amp Brown KL15 Shifter Transmission Module (STM) (3.6),
KL15 Starter Relay Coil (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F16 7.5 Amp Brown KL15 Manual Transmission Automated (MTA),
KL15 Shift Lever Unit, KL15 Engine Control Mod-
ule (ECM), KL15 Starter Relay Coil (3.0 Diesel En-
gine)
364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F17 20 Amp Yellow Engine Control Module (ECM), Injectors (3.6
Gasoline Engine)
F17 20 Amp Yellow Secondary Loads, Engine Control Module (ECM)
(3.0 Diesel Engine)
F18 7.5 Amp Brown KL30 Engine Control Module (ECM), KL30 Main
Relay Coil (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F18 7.5 Amp Brown KL30 Manual Transmission Automated (MTA),
KL30 Engine Control Module (ECM), KL30 Main
Relay Coil (3.0 Diesel Engine)
F19 7.5 Amp Brown A/C Compressor (If Equipped)
F20 30 Amp Green Windshield Wiper
F21 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 20 Amp Yellow Engine Control Module (ECM), Ignition Coils (3.6
Gasoline Engine)
F22 20 Amp Yellow Engine Control Module (ECM), Primary Loads
(3.0 Diesel Engine)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F23 20 Amp Yellow Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Valves
F24 7.5 Amp Brown KL15 Vacuum pump relay coil (3.6 Gasoline En-
gine) — If Equipped
F30 15 Amp Blue Heated Mirrors
Front PDC Additional Fuses
The additional fuse box is located inside the front PDC
Box.
Front Power Distribution Center Additional Fuses
366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F61 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump (3.6 Gasoline Engine) — If Equipped
F62 30 Amp Green Transmission Power RELE (3.6 Gasoline Engine) — If
Equipped
F64 7.5 Amp Brown Urea Pump (3.0 Diesel Engine) — If Equipped
F65 25 Amp White Urea NOX Sensor 1–2 — PM Sensor (3.0 Diesel En-
gine) — If Equipped
F66 5 Amp Beige Shifter Transmission Module (STM) (3.6 Gasoline En-
gine) — If Equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control
Module (BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under
the instrument panel.
Fuse Panel
368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fuse Panel Cavity Locations
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F12 10 Amp Red Right Low Beam
F13 10 Amp Red Left Low Beam
F31 5 Amp Beige INT/A
F32 10 Amp Red SBMT
F34 7.5 Amp Brown Clearance Lights
F36 15 Amp Blue +30 (ACM – TPCU – RRM – DLC)
F37 5 Amp Beige INT (BRAKE NO – IPC)
F38 15 Amp Blue Central Locking
F42 5 Amp Beige INT (BSM – SAS – BRAKE NC)
F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-Directional Washer Pump
F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Window
F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Window
F49 5 Amp Beige INT (PAM – CCS – RRM – ECM)
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F50 7.5 Amp Brown INT (ORC)
F51 5 Amp Beige INT (REAR CAMERA-AUX)
F53 5 Amp Beige +30 (IPC)
F90 7.5 Amp Brown Left High Beam
F91 7.5 Amp Brown Right High Beam
F92 7.5 Amp Brown Left Fog Lamp
F93 7.5 Amp Brown Right Fog Lamp
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371
Right Central Pillar Fuses
The right central pillar fuse panel is located on the
interior side at the base of the passenger side B pillar.
Fuse Panel Location
Fuse Panel
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F81 7.5 Amp Brown Seat Heater
F83 20 Amp Yellow Rear Left Windows Heater
F84 20 Amp Yellow Rear Right Windows Heater
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Overhead Lamp C5W
Sun Visors C5W
Courtesy Lamp FF500
Glove Compartment C5W
Rear Courtesy Lamp C5W
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Front Low and High Beam Headlamp H7LL
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps 7444NA
Daytime Running Lamps (If Equipped) 7440
Front Side Marker Lamps WY5W
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps 7443
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Bulb Number
Rear Turn Signal Lamps 7440NA
Rear Backup Lamps 921
Rear Side Marker Lamps W3W
Front Fog Lamps H11
License Plate Lamps C5W
Front Roof Lamps WY5W
Rear Roof Lamps W3W
NOTE:
•
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer.
•
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Headlamps Low Beam And High beam
NOTE: Passenger side headlamp must be removed for
bulb replacement, for driver side headlamp go to step 6
through step 12.
1. Remove screw (1) on lower headlamp filler panel.
2. Remove screws (2) on upper headlamp filler panel.
3. Remove upper screw (1) from headlamp housing.
4. Remove lower screws (2) from headlamp housing.
5. Pull Headlamp forward.
6. Remove appropriate plastic cap from the back of the
headlamp housing.
7. Push down on the upper portion of the socket.
8. Pull the socket outward from reflector.
9. Pull bulb outward from socket.
10. Install new bulb.
11. Push socket back into reflector until it locks back into
place.
12. Install access cap.
13. Carefully reinstall headlamp in the same position on
the vehicle, so as not to affect headlamp aiming.
14. Install upper screw (1) on headlamp housing.
15. Install lower screws (2) on headlamp housing.
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
16. Carefully reinstall screw (1) on lower headlamp filler
panel.
17. Carefully reinstall screws (2) on upper headlamp
filler panel.
Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamps
NOTE: Passenger side headlamp must be removed for
bulb replacement, for driver side headlamp go to step 6
through step 7.
1. Remove screw (1) on lower headlamp filler panel.
2. Remove screws (2) on upper headlamp filler panel.
3. Remove upper screw (1) from headlamp housing.
4. Remove lower screws (2) from headlamp housing.
5. Pull Headlamp forward.
6. Rotate the bulb counter clockwise and remove.
7. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
8. Carefully reinstall headlamp in the same position on
the vehicle, so as not to affect headlamp aiming.
9. Install upper screw (1) on headlamp housing.
10. Install lower screws (2) on headlamp housing.
11. Carefully reinstall screw (1) on lower headlamp filler
panel.
12. Carefully reinstall screws (2) on upper headlamp
filler panel.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)/Front Side Marker
Lamp
NOTE: Passenger side headlamp must be removed for
bulb replacement, for driver side headlamp go to step 6
through step 8.
1. Remove screw (1) on lower headlamp filler panel.
2. Remove screws (2) on upper headlamp filler panel.
3. Remove upper screw (1) from headlamp housing.
4. Remove lower screws (2) from headlamp housing.
5. Pull Headlamp forward.
6. Remove the DRL, side marker bulb by pulling straight
out.
7. Replace lamp as required and lock in place.
8. Reinstall plastic cap.
9. Carefully reinstall headlamp in the same position on
the vehicle, so as not to affect headlamp aiming.
10. Install upper screw (1) on headlamp housing.
11. Install lower screws (2) on headlamp housing.
12. Carefully reinstall screw (1) on lower headlamp filler
panel.
13. Carefully reinstall screws (2) on upper headlamp
filler panel.
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Front Fog Lamps
1. Turn front wheels inboard to access cover in wheel
liner.
2. Open the cover on the front of the wheel liner.
3. Remove connection and replace the bulb.
4. Connect the wire and rotate bulb/socket clockwise
into lamp locking it in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap and close the cover on the
wheel liner.
Front, Rear Roof Lamps
1. Remove two screw and remove the lamp assembly.
2. Remove the socket bulb by turning counterclockwise.
3. Remove bulb and replace as needed.
4. Reinstall the bulb socket and rotate clockwise to lock
in place.
5. Reinstall lamp.
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup, Turn Signal And Rear
Side Marker Lamps
1. Open rear doors.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp.
3. Remove the tail/stop, turn signal, backup and rear
side marker bulb/socket by rotating counter-
clockwise.
4. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
5. Reinstall bulb/socket and rotate clockwise to lock in
place.
6. Reinstall lamp.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 24 Gallons 90 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certi-
fied)
6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula or equivalent)
10.5 Quarts 10 Liters
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the require-
ments of FCA US Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and Shell
Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – 3.6L Gasoline Engine Only Use Only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid. Fail-
ure to use ATF+4® fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission. We recommend
MOPAR® ATF+4® Fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 4.
Power Steering Reservoir Use Pentosin CHF 11S power steering fluid meeting
FCA US Material Standard MS-11655.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate in the instrument clus-
ter. This means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer
tow, and extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
Duty.
386 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering and fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Maintenance Chart
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-
lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 387
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot
seals, and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake pads, replace as neces-
sary.
XXX X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
388 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Replace Brake Fluid every two years. * X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs. ** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10
years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) which-
ever comes first.
XX
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
* The brake fluid change interval is time based only,
mileage intervals do not apply.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 389
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
390 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .......................393
▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............393
▫ Prepare A List ........................393
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............393
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............393
▫ FCA USA LLC Customer Center ...........394
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .........394
▫ In Mexico Contact .....................395
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)...................395
▫ Service Contract ......................395
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION .............396
䡵 MOPAR®PARTS.......................397
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............397
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.......................397
▫ In Canada...........................397
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 393
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA USA LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
394 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 395
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
396 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
MOPAR® PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 397
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
398 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 399
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
400 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............346
Adding Fuel .............................264
Adding Washer Fluid ......................343
Additives, Fuel ...........................262
AirBag.................................41
Air Bag Operation .......................43
If A Deployment Occurs ...................49
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............52
Transporting Pets ........................63
Air Bag Light .........................67, 128
Air Bag Maintenance .......................52
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .335
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................339
Air Conditioning..........................183
Air Conditioning Controls ...................183
Air Conditioning Filter .....................340
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..............339, 340
Air Conditioning System.................183, 339
Air Pressure, Tires.........................241
Alarm (Security Alarm) ......................15
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ................15
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............345, 380
Disposal ..............................347
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................220
Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................128
Appearance Care .........................353
Ashtray ................................119
Assist, Hill Start ..........................228
Audio Systems (Radio) .....................179
Auto Down Power Windows ..................23
Automatic Door Locks ......................21
Automatic Transaxle ........................11
Automatic Transmission .................202, 353
Adding Fluid .......................352, 353
Fluid And Filter Changes ..................353
Fluid Change ..........................353
Fluid Level Check .......................352
402 INDEX
Fluid Type .........................351, 383
Gear Ranges ...........................205
Special Additives .......................352
Battery.................................338
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........18
Belts, Seat ...............................67
Body Builders Guide ........................6
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................342
B-Pillar Location ..........................236
Brake Assist System .......................223
Brake Control System, Electronic ..............220
Brake Fluid .............................383
Brake, Parking ...........................218
Brake System .........................220, 349
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................220
Fluid Check ...........................350
Parking ..............................218
Warning Light .........................128
Brake/Transmission Interlock.................204
Bulb Replacement......................374, 376
Bulbs, Light...........................69, 374
Camera, Rear ............................113
Capacities, Fluid ..........................380
Caps, Filler
Fuel .................................264
Power Steering .........................217
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................347
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...................66
Cargo Light ..............................98
Car Washes .............................354
Cellular Phone ...........................182
Certification Label.........................266
Chains, Tire .............................252
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................231
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ............128, 329
10
INDEX 403
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............65
Checks, Safety ............................65
Child Restraint ............................54
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ...........................58
Child Restraints .........................54
Infants And Child Restraints ................56
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........57
Cigar Lighter ............................119
Clean Air Gasoline ........................260
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................355
Climate Control ..........................183
Manual ..............................183
Cold Weather Operation ....................201
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..............182
Compact Spare Tire ........................246
Console, Overhead ........................115
Contract, Service ..........................395
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........347
Cooling System...........................344
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............346
Coolant Capacity .......................380
Coolant Level ......................344, 348
Disposal Of Used Coolant .................347
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...................344
Inspection ............................348
Points To Remember .....................348
Pressure Cap ..........................347
Radiator Cap ..........................347
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......345, 380, 381
Corrosion Protection .......................353
Cruise Light .............................128
Cupholders ..........................119,360
Customer Assistance .......................393
Customer Programmable Features .............169
Dealer Service............................331
404 INDEX
Defroster, Windshield ....................67, 186
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................328
Dimmer Control ...........................94
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...................96
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ..................352
Oil (Engine) ...........................332
Power Steering .........................217
Disabled Vehicle Towing ....................321
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................347
Door Locks ..............................20
Door Locks, Automatic ......................21
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water ................................214
Electric Remote Mirrors......................75
Electronic Brake Control System ...............220
Brake Assist System .....................223
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........102
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............224
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Exit Trip ..............................147
NewTrip.............................146
Start Of Trip Procedure ...................147
Trip Computer .........................146
Trip Functions .........................147
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ................319
Jump Starting ..........................313
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........329
Engine
Air Cleaner ...........................335
Block Heater ..........................202
Break-In Recommendations .................64
Checking Oil Level ......................332
Compartment ..........................327
10
INDEX 405
Compartment Identification ................327
Coolant (Antifreeze) ..................344, 381
Cooling ..............................344
Exhaust Gas Caution .....................66
Fails To Start ..........................201
Flooded, Starting .......................201
Fuel Requirements ...................260, 380
Jump Starting ..........................313
Oil...........................332, 380, 381
Oil Filter .............................335
Oil Selection .......................333, 380
Oil Synthetic ..........................334
Overheating ...........................285
Starting ..............................200
Engine Oil Viscosity .......................334
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ...................334
Entry System, Illuminated ....................16
Ethanol ................................261
Exhaust Gas Caution........................66
Exhaust System ........................66, 336
Exterior Lighting ..........................94
Exterior Lights ............................69
Fabric Care..............................357
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................335
Air Conditioning .......................340
Engine Oil .........................335, 381
Engine Oil Disposal .....................334
Flashers
Hazard Warning ........................285
Turn Signal .........................69, 128
Flooded Engine Starting ....................201
Fluid Capacities ..........................380
Fluid Leaks ..............................69
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ..................352
Brake ................................350
406 INDEX
Cooling System .........................344
Power Steering .........................217
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ...........381
Fog Lights............................95, 128
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...................285
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................319
Fuel...................................260
Adding ..............................264
Additives .............................262
Clean Air .............................260
Ethanol ..............................261
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................264
Gasoline ..............................260
Gauge ...............................128
Light ................................128
Materials Added ........................262
Methanol .............................261
Octane Rating ......................260, 381
Requirements .......................260, 380
Tank Capacity ..........................380
Fueling ................................264
Fuses ..................................361
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .............264, 266, 328
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................260
Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................260
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................260
Gauges
Fuel .................................128
Odometer .............................128
Speedometer ..........................128
Tachometer ............................128
Gear Ranges .............................205
Gear Select Lever Override ..................320
General Information ....................183, 259
General Maintenance.......................128
Glass
Cleaning ...........................359
Gross Axle Weight Rating ................267, 270
10
INDEX 407
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ..............267, 269
Guide, Body Builders ........................6
GVWR .................................267
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .........................214
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................285
Headlights
Cleaning .............................358
High Beam ............................96
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........96
Passing ...............................96
Switch ................................94
Head Restraints ...........................88
Heated Mirrors............................76
Heated Seats .............................87
Heater .................................183
Heater, Engine Block .......................202
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch.....96
Hill Start Assist...........................228
Hitches
Trailer Towing .........................272
Hood Release .............................91
Ignition .................................11
Key..................................11
Ignition Key Removal .......................11
Illuminated Entry ..........................16
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................13
Inside Rearview Mirror ......................74
Instrument Cluster .....................127, 128
Instrument Panel And Controls ...............126
Instrument Panel Cover .....................357
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............359
Interior Appearance Care....................357
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............100
408 INDEX
Introduction ..............................4
Jump Starting ............................313
Key-In Reminder ..........................13
Key, Replacement ..........................14
Keys ...................................11
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................13
Lane Change Assist ........................96
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................27
Latches .................................69
Lead Free Gasoline ........................260
Leaks, Fluid ..............................69
Life Of Tires .............................250
Light Bulbs ...........................69, 374
Lights................................69, 93
AirBag............................67, 128
Anti-Lock .............................128
Brake Assist Warning ....................226
Brake Warning .........................128
Bulb Replacement .......................376
Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) .........128
Cruise ...............................128
Daytime Running ........................94
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...............93, 96
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator .....226
Engine Temperature Warning ...............128
Exterior ...............................69
Fog .................................128
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................285
Headlights .............................94
High Beam .........................96, 128
High Beam Indicator .....................128
Illuminated Entry ........................16
Instrument Cluster ......................128
Low Fuel .............................128
Map Reading ........................97, 115
10
INDEX 409
Oil Pressure ...........................128
Park .................................96
Passing ...............................96
Seat Belt Reminder ......................128
Service ...............................376
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............128
Traction Control ........................226
Turn Signal ..........................69, 93
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ......128
Loading Vehicle .......................266, 268
Capacities ............................268
Tires ................................236
Locks
Automatic Door .........................21
Door .................................20
Lubrication, Body .........................342
Lug Nuts ...............................286
Maintenance Free Battery....................338
Maintenance, General ......................128
Maintenance Procedures ....................331
Maintenance Schedule ......................386
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).......329
Manual, Service ..........................398
Map/Reading Lights ....................97, 115
Methanol ...............................261
Mirrors .................................74
Electric Remote .........................75
Exterior Folding .........................75
Heated ...............................76
Outside ...............................74
Rearview ..............................74
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................254
MOPAR® Parts .......................330, 397
MTBE/ETBE ............................261
Multi-Function Control Lever .................93
410 INDEX
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................64
Occupant Restraints ........................24
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ................260
Odometer...............................128
Trip.................................128
Oil Change Indicator .......................145
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..................145
Oil, Engine ..........................332, 381
Capacity .............................380
Change Interval ........................333
Checking .............................332
Disposal ..............................334
Filter .............................335, 381
Filter Disposal .........................334
Identification Logo ......................333
Materials Added To ......................334
Recommendation ....................333, 380
Synthetic .............................334
Viscosity ..........................334, 380
Oil Filter, Change .........................335
Oil Filter, Selection ........................335
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................328
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ....................74
Overhead Console .........................115
Overheating, Engine .......................285
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........4,398
Paint Care ..............................353
Parking Brake............................218
ParkSense® System, Rear....................107
Passing Light .............................96
Personal Settings..........................169
Pets....................................63
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ..........237
Power
Mirrors ...............................75
10
INDEX 411
Steering ...........................216, 217
Windows ..............................22
Power Steering Fluid.......................383
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...............35
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................35
Radial Ply Tires ..........................243
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........347
Radio Operation ..........................182
Rear Camera.............................113
Rear ParkSense System .....................107
Rearview Mirrors ..........................74
Recreational Towing .......................281
Reformulated Gasoline .....................260
Refrigerant ..............................340
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
FCC General Information ..................19
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........181
Replacement Bulbs ........................374
Replacement Keys .........................14
Replacement Parts.........................330
Replacement Tires .........................250
Reporting Safety Defects ....................397
Restraint, Head ...........................88
Restraints, Child...........................54
Rotation, Tires ...........................253
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ..................67
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................69
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................397
Safety, Exhaust Gas.........................66
Safety Information, Tire .....................230
Safety Tips ...............................65
Schedule, Maintenance .....................386
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......33
412 INDEX
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........36
Energy Management Feature ................36
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................30
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................27
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............32
Pregnant Women ........................35
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................35
Seat Belt Reminder .......................26
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................359
Seat Belt Reminder .........................26
Seat Belts .............................25, 67
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................33
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........33
Child Restraint ..........................54
Front Seat ........................25, 27, 30
Inspection .............................67
Operating Instructions ....................30
Pregnant Women ........................35
Pretensioners ...........................35
Rear Seat ..............................27
Reminder .............................128
Untwisting Procedure .....................32
Seats ...................................78
Adjustment ............................78
Heated ...............................87
Security Alarm ............................15
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............381
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information ..................14
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................13
Service Assistance .........................393
Service Contract ..........................395
Service Manuals ..........................398
Service Reminder Indicator ..................128
Shift Lever Override .......................320
Shoulder Belts ............................27
Signals, Turn ..........................69, 128
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ...................252
10
INDEX 413
Snow Tires ..............................245
Spare Tire ...........................246, 248
Spark Plugs .............................381
Speed Control (Cruise Control)................102
Speedometer.............................128
Starting ................................200
Automatic Transmission ..................200
Cold Weather ..........................201
Engine Fails To Start .....................201
Steering
Column Lock ..........................101
Power ............................216, 217
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............181
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .181
Storage ................................373
Storage, Vehicle...........................373
Storing Your Vehicle .......................373
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag .........41
Sway Control, Trailer.......................227
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................334
Tachometer..............................128
Telescoping Steering Column .................101
Tire And Loading Information Placard .......236, 237
Tire Markings ............................230
Tires.............................69, 240, 399
Aging (Life Of Tires) .....................250
Air Pressure ...........................240
Chains ...............................252
Compact Spare .........................246
General Information .....................240
High Speed ...........................243
Inflation Pressures .......................241
Life Of Tires ...........................250
Load Capacity ......................236, 237
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............254
Pressure Warning Light ...................128
Quality Grading ........................399
414 INDEX
Radial ...............................243
Replacement ...........................250
Rotation ..............................253
Safety ............................230, 240
Sizes ................................231
Snow Tires ............................245
Spinning .............................248
Trailer Towing .........................276
Tread Wear Indicators ....................249
Tire Safety Information .....................230
Tire Service Kit ...........................288
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ................273
Torque Converter Clutch ....................213
Towing .............................269, 321
Disabled Vehicle ........................321
Guide ...............................273
Recreational ...........................281
Weight ...............................273
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ...........281
Traction .............................213, 214
Traction Control ..........................222
Traction Control Switch .....................222
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..................227
Trailer Towing ...........................269
Cooling System Tips .....................281
Hitches ..............................272
Minimum Requirements ..................274
Tips.................................280
Trailer And Tongue Weight ................273
Wiring ...............................278
Trailer Towing Guide.......................273
Trailer Weight............................273
Transaxle
Automatic .............................11
Transmission
Automatic ............................202
Fluid .............................351,
383
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .18
10
INDEX 415
Transporting Pets ..........................63
Tread Wear Indicators ......................249
Trip Odometer ...........................128
Turn Signals .............................128
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................399
Unleaded Gasoline ........................260
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................32
Upholstery Care ..........................357
Vehicle Certification Label ...................266
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............6
Vehicle Loading ....................237, 266, 268
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............7
Vehicle Storage ...........................373
Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................334
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .128
Warnings And Cautions ......................6
Warranty Information ......................396
Washer
Adding Fluid ..........................343
Washing Vehicle ..........................354
Water
Driving Through ........................214
Wheel And Wheel Trim .....................355
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................355
Wind Buffeting............................23
Windows ................................22
Power ................................22
Windshield Defroster ....................67, 186
Windshield Washers .....................99, 343
Fluid .................................99
Windshield Wiper Blades....................342
Windshield Wipers .........................99
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................342
Wipers, Intermittent .......................100
Wrench (Service Indicator) ...................128
416 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Promaster
OWNER’S MANUAL
2015
2015 Promaster
15VF-126-AF SIXTH Edition Printed in U.S.A.
FCA US LLC
